JP2020011109A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can give variations in a displacement mode of a displacing member while keeping an output of driving means constant.SOLUTION: When a driven member 550 is displaced by a driving motor 530, in response to the displacement of the driven member 550, a follower member 560 can be moved accordingly in a relative displacement. That means, even when the driven member 550 is displaced in a fixed orbit, the follower member 560 can be displaced in a different orbit from that of the driven member 550. Also, even when the driving motor 530 is displaced in a fixed speed rate, the follower member 560 can be displaced in an orbit different from that of the driven member 550. As the result, variations can be given to a displacement mode of the follower member 560 while the output of the driving motor 530 is kept constant.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force from a driving unit causes, for example, an overhanging position to be a front surface of the liquid crystal display device and a display of the liquid crystal display device from the overhanging position. 2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retreat position and a retreat position where the retreat member is retreated in a direction outside a region (Patent Document 1). According to this gaming machine, by changing the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent, a change is given to the mode of displacement of the displacement member.

JP 2011-200790 A (see, for example, paragraph 0095, FIGS. 11 to 15)

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the output of the driving unit is changed, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced in accordance with the change of the output of the driving unit. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the mode of displacement of a displacement member while keeping the output of a driving unit constant. .

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, a driven member that is displaced by being driven by the driving force generated by the driving unit, and a driven member that is displaced by the driving unit. A holding member that displaceably holds the driven member, and a driven member that is connected to the driven member so that the driven member can be displaced, and a displacement defining unit that defines a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, When the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member is defined by the displacement defining means, the driven member is displaced with respect to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means. Relative displacement.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member and the holding member, and the first groove formed along the first groove. And a first guided portion formed on the other of the driven member and the holding member.

  A game machine according to a third aspect is the game machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, thereby causing the driven member to be displaced. With the displacement of the driven member, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a fixed trajectory such as a straight line or an arc, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from the driven member. In addition, since the change in the mode of the displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced on the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the displacement defining means includes the first groove and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion extends along the first groove. The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be defined by guiding the portion. Thus, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, whereby the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the first groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped portion (first groove portion) and the portion guided by the portion (first guided portion), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state. When the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement, the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a change in the strong impression as a change in the mode of the displacement. it can.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit in a state where the proximal displacement member and the relative displacement member are arranged at the retracted position. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the transmission means in front view typically. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the transmission means in front view typically. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the protruding operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit in portion XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a driven member and a driven member, and (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface of the driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, and (b) is a back surface of the driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVI in FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a longitudinal section of a rotation operation unit. (A) is a rear view of the main body, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. 38A is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. .

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and "4R probability variable jackpot" means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the projecting operation unit 400 and the composite operation unit 500 described below are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 can be visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit housing member 300. FIG. 5 shows a state in which each of the operation units 400 to 800 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. The state of being arranged at the outgoing position is shown in each figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 includes a rectangular bottom wall plate as viewed from the front and an outer wall plate erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion. A unit storage member 300 formed in a box shape whose side is open. The bottom plate of the unit housing member 300 is formed with a rectangular opening 301 in a front view at a center portion thereof, whereby the unit housing member 300 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the unit storage member 300, the protruding operation unit 400, the composite operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the retreat operation unit 700, and the overhang operation unit 800 are stored in the internal space, respectively. Is configured as

  The protruding operation unit 400 includes a base-side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and moves (displaces) the two displacement members 440 and 450 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let it. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stacked in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 to increase the size of the entire body, thereby ensuring visibility and enhancing the effect of rendering. The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The composite operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and moves the two members 550 and 560 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. To operate (displace). In this case, the composite operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only the rotational movement about the predetermined position as the center of rotation, while causing the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 to perform the linear movement. By performing the motion in combination with the rotation motion, a change is given to the trajectory of the driven member 560, and the effect is enhanced. The operation of the composite operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The rotation operation unit 600 includes a first rotator 650 and a second rotator 660 that are arranged concentrically, and by rotating both of the rotators 650 and 660, it is easy to associate both rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotation operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the retractable operation unit 700 includes a retractable member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the extending operation unit 800 includes a rotatable extended member 810, respectively, and the retractable member 710 and the extended member 810 are provided. Slide between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and a projecting position (not shown) which projects to the front (front) of the opening 301 (third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). (Displacement).

  Next, the projecting operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400 in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

  FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 700 that shares the projecting operation unit 400 and the case body 410 is provided along with the projecting operation unit 400. Further, a pair of projecting operation units 400 is disposed below the opening 301 on the left and right sides of the projecting operation unit 700 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since the structures are substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side in the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side in the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the projecting operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 forming a skeleton on the back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and a drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (a pinion gear 431, an intermediate gear 432, and a crank gear 433) for transmitting a rotational driving force, a base displacement member 440 rotatably supported by the case body 410, and a slide displacement by the base displacement member 440; It is mainly configured to include a relative displacement member 450 that is provided so as to be able to be disposed, and a connecting rod 460 that connects the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and that is rotatably supported by the case body 410. You.

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a housing recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (each of the gears 431, 432, and 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 protrudes from the side of the storage recess 411 (right side in FIG. 8A), and a base support shaft 413 protrudes below the storage recess 411 (lower side in FIG. 8A). Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material, and is disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation shaft of each of the gears 431 to 433.

  In the present embodiment, when the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as described later, each of the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, and each of the gears 431, 432, and 433 are connected to each other. Are stacked in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is formed in the front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively. Accordingly, the size of the protruding operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced accordingly.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to a drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is meshed with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is meshed with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is driven to rotate and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are supported by the case 410. Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 has a radial decoration formed on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than that of the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large so that teeth can be shielded from the player in front view.

  A crank pin 433a protrudes from the front (axial end face) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a columnar body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effecting members for performing an effect by being displaced from the retracted position to the extended position (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and include the base-side displacement member 440 (the shaft support). The hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base displacement member 440.

  Here, the decorative portion 454 is formed on the front side of the relative displacement member 450. The decorative portion 454 is a portion for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is arranged from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8). The whole is formed in a tapered shape as viewed from the front, which becomes narrower toward the distal end side (the rotational distal end side when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. , A first portion 454a, a second portion 454b, and a third portion 454c are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed in a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. That is, the second portion 454b located at the middle of the first portion 454a located at the distal end is connected to the third portion 454c located at the base end of the second portion 454b located at the middle. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged so that their positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5) are different from each other. Specifically, the second portion 454b located at the middle of the first portion 454a located at the distal end is connected to the third portion 454c located at the base end of the second portion 454b located at the middle. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Thereby, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) moves from the base end side (the rotation center side of the base displacement member 440, the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8) to the distal end side (the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8). 7 and 8 (in the upper end of FIGS. 7 and 8), it is inclined downward in a stepwise manner (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction approaching the case body 410.

  Thus, as described later, when rotating the proximal displacement member 440 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decorative member 480 is prevented from contacting with the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). When the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the decorative portion 454 is moved forward (front). ) To improve the power.

  The detailed configuration of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connection rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and has a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as a long hole extending along the longitudinal direction at the other end in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and a longitudinal direction between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462. And a rod groove 463 recessed on the back side as a concave groove extending along.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. The connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Accordingly, as described later, the rotation of the crank gear 433 causes the connection rod 460 to rotate about the rod support shaft 412 as a rotation center (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and the rotation of the connection rod 460 causes The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slidably displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and are operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base-side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front (one side) side of the case body 410. As compared with the case where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are provided on the front (one side) side and the drive motor 420 is provided on the back side (other side) side with the case body 410 interposed therebetween, the projecting operation is performed. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Further, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive motor 420 is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 13A). The 420 and the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as a retreat position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is formed by a plurality of gears (each of the gears 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. A portion composed of a connecting rod 460 forming a mechanism, and a portion where the connecting rod 460 (the connecting hole 462 and the rod groove 463) is connected to the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 and the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 as described later. Of the transmission means (each of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and each of the support shafts 411 and 412 so that the Set the placement.

  Accordingly, in a state where the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission unit is disposed in an area overlapping the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in a front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the rear side of the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively used as a space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effect of the above-described positional relationship between the drive motor 420 and the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450, it is possible to synergistically achieve a reduction in the outer shape of the protruding operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and front view. it can.

  Next, the operation of the transmission means (the pinion gear 431, the intermediate gear 432, the crank gear 433, and the connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing transmission means in a front view. FIG. 9A shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 9A. 10 illustrates a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotation position, and FIG. 10 illustrates a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position.

  9 and 10, the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 are schematically illustrated to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rods 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position, the intermediate rotational position, and the second rotational position are two positions P1, Pm, and P2. This is schematically illustrated using a chain line.

  In the description of FIGS. 9 and 10, FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 are appropriately referred to. FIG. 9A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and FIG. 9B corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B. FIG. 10 corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is at the position P1, the base-side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position, and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. They are arranged at reference positions, respectively (see FIGS. 12A and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, in a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (ie, counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, tensions the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position) can be restricted by bringing the crankpin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when disposing the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the extended position to the retracted position, for example, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, the mechanical displacement can be reduced. The basic displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retreat position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism for restricting the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are displaced. Can be avoided beforehand.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 moves the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 to the lower end (rod end). The connecting rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A about the rod supporting shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is located at the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is located at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 pushes the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod end). After sliding toward the end opposite to the support shaft 412), it is slid toward the upper end (the end on the side of the rod support shaft 412), and the connecting rod 460 rotates around the rod support shaft 412 as shown in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). Thereby, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotation position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P2. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is located at the rotation position and the relative displacement member 450 is located at the overhang position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  When the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position, similarly to the case where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 460 is located at the upper end of the rod groove 463 (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side).

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is located at the second rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise in FIG. 10 (that is, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). Rotation in the direction of projecting to the position) can be restricted by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when disposing the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the retracted position to the extended position, for example, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, mechanically The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the projecting position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism for restricting the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and these two displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are moved. Collision with another member can be avoided beforehand.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the configuration and operation of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base-side displacement member 440 includes a main body 441 formed in a long plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body 411, and a main body 441. And a first slide hole 443 and a second slide hole 444 that are formed as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11).

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted. By this insertion, the base displacement member 440 can rotate on the case body 410 about the base support shaft 413 as a center of rotation. It is supported by. That is, as will be described later, the base-side displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12B, 12C, 14 and 15). And is rotatably supported between them.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed below the center of the main body 411 in the longitudinal direction and at a position closer to one side (overhang position) than the center of the main body 411 in the width direction. Accordingly, the rotation angle required for the base-side displacement member 440 to reduce the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative-displacement member 450 from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (a predetermined area) can be reduced. The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be reduced, and as a result, the effect of the displacement of the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  The relative displacement member 450 has a main body 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the main body 451 (vertical direction in FIG. 11). It is mainly provided with a pair of slide pins 453 arranged with a space therebetween, and a decorative portion 454 arranged on the front of the main body 451.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base-side displacement member 440, respectively. Are disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 along its longitudinal direction. That is, as described later, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b), 13 and 14) and an extended position (see FIGS. 12 (c) and 15). Is disposed on the base-side displacement member 440 so as to be slidable between them.

  In this case, the distal end of the connection pin 452 protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base-side displacement member 440 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and the relative displacement member 450 is thereby inserted. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as described later, the rotation of the crank gear 433 causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate about the rod support shaft 412 as a rotation center (see FIG. 9), so that the base relative to the base support shaft 413 as the rotation center. The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be performed, and the sliding displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be performed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are arranged at different positions (at intervals) along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the portion where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front-rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 (the direction in which the relative displacement member 450 approaches and separates from the case body 410). ) Can be suppressed and the slide displacement can be stabilized.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is disposed closer to the longitudinal end of the relative displacement member 450 than the slide pin 453 (upper side in FIG. 11). Accordingly, the position where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be made closer to the longitudinal end of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the position where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base-side displacement member 440 toward the front end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 from swaying in the front-rear direction (direction approaching and separating from the case body 410).

  That is, only the base side (the shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the base side displacement member 440 is provided with the relative displacement member 450. Because of the structure, the distal ends in the longitudinal direction of the two displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the distal ends are likely to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking may cause the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position to be supported on the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is set to the longitudinal end side is effective.

  The collar C is rotatably fitted to the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. Since the collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pins 452 and the slide pins 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, each of the collars C extends along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can slide smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, a large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base-side displacement member 440 and the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460. The facing distance between the base-side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is secured to the connecting rod 460 by a disk-shaped disc S fastened to the end face on the distal end side by screws, and the slide pin 453 is fixed to the end face on the distal end side. The slide guide 470 in the form of a long flat plate is fastened and fixed by screws, and is prevented from coming off from the base side displacement member 440.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. FIG. 12A corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is located at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1). FIG. 12B corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 9B and 14 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is located at the intermediate rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position Pm, respectively). . FIG. 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is located at the second rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9A and 13), the rotation of the base displacement member 440 about the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation is performed. The reference position is a position where the relative displacement member 450 slides with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 at a retreat position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412, and a position where the amount of protrusion from the base-side displacement member 440 is minimized. Position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460.

  When the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9A) rotates from the state shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (FIG. 12A) about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (the end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 440 are rotated. The displacement member 450 is rotated clockwise (first operation) in FIG. 12A with the relative displacement member 450 together with the relative displacement member 450 with the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm as shown in FIG. 12B (see FIGS. 9B and 14), the rotational position of the proximal displacement member 440 is changed to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at the rotation position which is the position furthest away from the camera.

  In this case, the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 about the rod supporting shaft 412 as a rotation center in FIG. 12A counterclockwise rotates the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 with the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 at the lower end. When sliding in the direction of, since the sliding direction is substantially along the direction of the sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is moved relative to the base-side displacement member 440. No force component is generated in the direction of sliding displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the proximal displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of the slide displacement from the reference position), the displacement of the proximal displacement member 440 about the proximal support shaft 413 as the center of rotation. Only rotation can be generated.

  Accordingly, both displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base support shaft 413 in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotation tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) or the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, the size of the projecting operation unit 400 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in design when defining the shape of the decorative member 480 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12B, the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9B) causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 12B around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 slides toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). (The side end), and the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the relative displacement member 450 extends in the longitudinal direction (the first and second slide holes 443 and 444) with respect to the base side displacement member 440. (Second operation). Thus, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 12C (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is changed to the base position. It is arranged at a position where the amount of protrusion from the side displacement member 440 is the maximum, which is the position where the amount of protrusion is maximum.

  In this case, the rotation position of the base-side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotation position that is the position farthest from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 counterclockwise in FIG. 12B counterclockwise about the rod support shaft 412 rotates the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. Since the sliding direction is substantially perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid with respect to the base-side displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and no force component in the direction of rotating the base displacement member 440 around the base support shaft 413 is used. Therefore, only the sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be generated while restricting the rotation of the proximal displacement member 440 about the rotation axis of the proximal support shaft 413.

  Accordingly, in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (a state where the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position), the proximal side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position. After the first operation is completed, the rotation of the base-side displacement member 440 is restricted (the base-side displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position), and the relative displacement member is rotated. The slide displacement (second operation) that extends the 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be performed. That is, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and performed in two stages as separate operations, the operation in a different mode can be performed as compared with the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously. It is possible for the user to clearly recognize, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect by displacing each of the displacement members 440 and 450.

  The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 to 15 are front views of the projecting operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13A and 13B correspond to the states illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 12A, and FIGS. 14A and 14B correspond to the states illustrated in FIGS. 9 (b) and 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). 13 (b), 14 (b) and 15 (b) show a state in which the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 have been removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the projecting operation unit 400, as described above, the base-side displacement member 440 moves the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A to the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13) is formed so as to be rotatable between the rotational positions shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and the relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base side displacement member 440 is positioned between the reference position shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A. A first operation for sliding the base-side displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position between the projecting position shown in FIG. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the extended position can be executed.

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base-side displacement member 440 at the retracted position is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is moved to the second position. By performing the sliding displacement (extending) to the extended position by the operation, the relative displacement member 450 can be extended outward from the base-side displacement member 440 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be made larger as a whole, so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, by disposing the base-side displacement member 440 to the rotation position by the first operation, the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (the decoration portion in this embodiment). The entire first portion 454a of the 454 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86. As shown in FIG. , The substantially entire relative displacement member 450 (in the present embodiment, the entire third portion 454 a of the hitting decorative portion 454) can be visually recognized by the player via the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 retracted to the retracted position and made invisible from the opening of the center frame 86 is first made to appear from the side into the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational movement (first operation). The player can visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and then, by linear motion (second operation), projects toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86, and the An effect of making the player visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visual area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by a motion mode (linear motion) different from the motion mode at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the unexpected area due to the change in the motion mode and the visual area by the linear motion can be increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the composite operation due to the combination of these being performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved in a mode in which the relative displacement member 450 protrudes and retracts from the opening of the center frame 86 by simply linear movement (a mode in which the relative displacement member 450 reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position).

  On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member in the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A by the first operation, as shown in FIG. 14A and FIG. By sliding (shortening) the relative displacement member 450 to the reference position by the second operation, the protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 outward from the base-side displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement members 440 and 450 can be reduced in size as a whole, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement members 440 and 450 at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other components and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the proximal displacement member 440, and the second operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slid with respect to the base displacement member 450 between the reference position and the extended position, for example, the second operation is to move the relative displacement member 440 relative to the base displacement member 450. As compared with the case of rotating, the space required for displacing the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the overhang position can be suppressed, and other components and devices are accordingly disposed. Space can be secured. Also, since the mode of displacement (slide displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the mode of displacement (rotation) of the proximal-side displacement member 450 by the first operation, The effect of performing by performing the first operation and the second operation continuously can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is set to a direction along the longitudinal direction of the two displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed in the posture along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base-side displacement member 440, and is slid in the direction along the longitudinal direction. 450 can be efficiently extended and shortened as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in a state where the base-side displacement member 440 is located at the rotation position, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced (extended) so as to increase the overall displacement so that the two displacement members 440 are increased. , 450 can be sufficiently recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in a state where the base-side displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position, the relative displacement member 450 is made smaller as a whole by sliding displacement (shortening), so that the two displacement members 440 are reduced. , 450, and a space for disposing other components and devices can be secured.

  Further, according to the protruding operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 corresponds to FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (b). As shown in FIG. 15B and FIG. 15B, the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 which comprises a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460 and forms a crank mechanism together with the crank gear 433. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 411 that is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base support shaft 412 that is the rotation center of the base displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations, that is, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the cost of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as the transmission means, a gear may be provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460, and the teeth of the crank gear 433 may be meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460. In this case, the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are provided side by side in the plane, and no overlapping margin is formed in a front view, so that the space required for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, it is shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be arranged in a state where there is always an overlap margin in a front view, and the space required for disposing the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Next, a relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400. 17A is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 in a portion XVIIb of FIG. 17A. It is. FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a decorative member 480 is disposed above the protruding operation unit 400 (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, another member located on the back side of the decoration member 480 can be visually recognized by the player via the decoration member 480 (transmitted).

  In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed such that a part thereof projects downward (downward in FIG. 17B), so that the base-side displacement member as viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 17B. 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are formed with an overlap margin of the dimension L. Accordingly, when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectory of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is changed. It can be made to overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 in a front view.

  That is, since the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced in a state of passing through the back side of the decoration member 480, the operation of intersecting the decoration member 480 and both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the intersection, the decoration members 480 can be transmitted and the two displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect of rendering both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. In particular, in the present embodiment, the distal end side of the substrate displacement member 440 separated from the decorative member 480 is made to protrude beyond the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 close to the decorative member 480, so that it is difficult to make contact with the decorative member 480. As a result, the dimension L, which is the overlap margin, can be made larger. Therefore, the effect of the intersection can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 that forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned on the proximal end side (the rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, FIG. b) From the lower side to the distal side (the rotation distal side of the proximal displacement member 440, the upper side in FIG. 17B), it is inclined stepwise in a direction approaching the case body 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B). You. In addition, the distal end side of the base-side displacement member 440 disposed on the back side (the left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is made to protrude beyond the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, the whole of the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be shaped to be disposed closer to the case body 410 (rear side, left side in FIG. 17B) as the distal end side.

  Thus, when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectory overlaps the decoration member 480 in a front view. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 480 from coming into contact with the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 while ensuring the effect of the effect.

  In this case, the base-side displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is supported by the base-side support shaft 413, and the distal end side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). During the first operation, the front end side is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating to the case body 410 side, the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5), and the possibility of contact with the decorative member 480 is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment (the shape that is inclined such that the tip end side is closer to the case body 410 side) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the entire decorative portion 454 approached to the case body 410 side, but, as described above, the distal end side (the rotation distal end side of the proximal end displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). A shape closer to the front (front) (right side in FIG. 17B) is closer to the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than upper side. That is, the decorative portion 454 is stepped up and inclined in a direction away from the case body 410 (the right side in FIG. 17B) from the distal end toward the proximal end.

  Thereby, when the relative displacement member 450 is slid (the second operation) from the reference position to the overhang position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved to the front (front) side (ie, to the front). (Closer to the player) to increase the power. In particular, in the present embodiment, the outer shape is made larger as the portion (the second portion 454b is larger than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c is larger than the second portion 454b) arranged on the front (front) side. Can be more effectively exerted.

  Next, the composite operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 illustrates a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5). You.

  Here, a pair of the composite operation units 500 is disposed on the left and right sides of the rotary operation unit 600 above the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since they are formed and have substantially the same structure, only one (the one disposed on the right side in the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side in the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the composite operation unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the driving motor 530 and causes the driven member 560 to follow the displacement of the driven member 550. Then, the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, as described later, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing its relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and sliding displacement (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Accordingly, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed along a fixed trajectory about the predetermined position (the shaft portions 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 is driven by a different trajectory from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and the mode of displacement of the driven member 560 can be changed. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to change the mode of displacement of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the composite operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the composite operation unit 500. FIG. FIG. 22A is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22B is a view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to a state where the composite operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 18 is disassembled, and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state where the composite operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 19 is disassembled. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the state shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a rear case body 520 that form a skeleton thereof, a drive motor 530 disposed on the rear side of the rear case body 520, A crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, a driven member 550 to which the driving force of the drive motor 530 is transmitted via the crank member 540, and a relative displacement of the driven member 550 And a driven member 560 that is connected as possible.

  The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are provided in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, respectively. It is accommodated in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed to have a size that allows the crank pin 541 to reciprocate. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by extracting a part of an annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27 (a) to FIG. 29 (a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As described later, the first pin 561a slides along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guidance), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (particularly, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27A to 29A). .

  The rear case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is provided concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. That is, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 have their shaft support holes 511, 521 supporting the shaft portions 553, 554 of the driven member 550, respectively, so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. Can support. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted. The drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by extracting a part of an annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to FIG. 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. As described later, the connection shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523. By performing (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (particularly, the relative sliding position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27B to 29B).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) at the time of being driven to rotate by the drive motor 530. A crank pin 541 is provided at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 with the rotation, and the shaft portions 553 and 554 are pivotally supported. By being pivotally supported by the holes 511 and 521, it is rotatably held by the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. Here, a detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 23A is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23B is a rear view of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-shaped front plate portion 551, and a long plate-shaped interposition that intersects the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle in front view. A plate portion 552, a cylindrical shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552, and a circle protruding from the back surface of the interposed plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553. It mainly comprises a columnar shaft 554.

  The front plate portion 551 is a member disposed on the front surface of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an oblong front view at one end (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected). A drive groove 551a is formed. The drive groove 551a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can slide along the drive groove 551a, whereby the shaft 553, 554 is covered with the rotation center. The driving member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

  The interposed plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has one end side (front gastric body portion 551). A connection groove 552a having an oval shape as viewed from the front is formed in the side opposite to the side to which is connected. The connection groove 552a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b rotatably and slidably. That is, a driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has an area overlapping the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 554, and It is configured such that the connection shaft 561b can be arranged in that area (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as described later, the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553 and 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed of a resin material as a separate member from these portions 552 to 554. The axial end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface on the opposite side to the interposed plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the rear surface on the base end side (the side opposite to the side where the drive groove 551a is formed) of the front plate portion 551, It is assembled by fastening and fixing both with screws.

  In this case, four pins 553a protrude from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four positions on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. It is perforated and assembled with each pin 553a received in each hole 551b. Accordingly, the number of screws can be reduced, and the cost of parts can be reduced, and the relative rotation of the flat plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552 can be reliably prevented.

  Returning to FIGS. 20 to 23, the description will be continued. As described above, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. 560 is connected so that relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement) is possible. As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven by the displacement of the driving member 550, and connects the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 to the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550. In addition, by being inserted into the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are held rotatably and slidably displaceable. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped interposed plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions having a decorative shape formed on the front thereof, It mainly comprises a back plate 563 connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 and connected to the back of the interposed plate 561.

  The interposed plate portion 561 is a member (see FIGS. 20 and 21) disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and has a front case body 510 at the front. A first pin 561a inserted into the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) protrudes, and a connection shaft 561b protrudes from the rear surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Is done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, so that the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the rear case body 520 about the connection shaft 561b as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the interposed plate portion 561 (that is, the driven member 560) slides in a direction along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a driven member. It is slid relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided in the interposed plate portion 561 is inserted into the third case 520 of the rear case body 520. The same operation as in the above-described case can be obtained by inserting the second guide groove 523.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is connected to both the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552). The driven member 560 is inserted into the connection shaft 561b and guided by the second guide groove 523 to define the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the rear case body 520 (that is, the driven member 560 is slid with respect to the driven member 550). ) And a role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement) by being inserted into the connection groove 561b. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  The back plate portion 563 is a circular member as viewed from the front, which is provided on the back surface of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has a contact portion on its front surface (the front side surface in FIG. 25A). 563a is protruded. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the rear surface of the rear case body 520, and is formed in a front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion of the rear plate portion 563 (the protruding distal end surface of the contact portion 562a) contacts the rear surface of the rear case body 520.

  As described above, by providing the contact portion 563 concentric with the connection shaft 561b on the rear plate portion 563, when the connection shaft 561b is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a is provided. Even when the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the back case body 520 about the connection shaft 561b as a rotation center by the rotation action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body is also provided. It is possible to keep the contact state of the 520 against the back surface constant, and suppress a change in the support reaction force. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposed plate portion 561 is formed separately from the respective portions 562 and 563 from a resin material. The connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 is brought into contact with the front face of the connecting plate 561 in the axial direction, and the two are assembled and fastened with screws. The structure in which the plurality of pins 561c projecting from the axial end surface of the connection shaft 561b are respectively received in the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563 so that the two can be relatively non-rotatably connected is the above-described driven structure. The description is omitted because it is the same as the case of the member 550.

  Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the description will be continued. The assembly of the composite operation unit 500 can be performed as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. In this assembling, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is previously inserted into the connection groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the rear case body 520, and the crank pin 541 is connected to the driven member 550 through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. (Front plate portion 551). At the same time, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the rear plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. I do. Accordingly, the driven member 560 can be rotatably assembled to the rear case body 520, can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner, and can be driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are fastened and fixed by screws (not shown). Accordingly, the driven member 550 is displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (followed) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the composite operation unit 500, since the components can be assembled by sequentially assembling the components to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, not only the assembly cost can be reduced, but also the unitization can be achieved. Thus, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the game machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the composite operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 27A, 28A, and 29A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIGS. FIGS. 28B and 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  Similarly, FIGS. 30A, 31A, and 32A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30B, 30B, and 30B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (the state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate the case where the driven member 560 is disposed in the extended position. (A state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 corresponds to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is located at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located on the right side in front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). Accordingly, the driven member 550 inclines the distal end side (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (the right side in FIG. 30B) when viewed from the front, and The end 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (upward in FIG. 30B). In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotation position where the rotation ends in the clockwise (clockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is configured such that the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 is lifted upward, so that the connection shaft 561b is positioned at the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed up to the upper side in FIG. 27 (b). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30 (b)) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 30 (b)). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 is configured such that the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is located at the upper end side (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (FIG. The horizontal posture is such that the portion where the first pin 561a is disposed) is directed leftward in front view (left side in FIG. 27A). In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotation position where the rotation ends in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIGS. 27 and 30 is located at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates the drive shaft 531 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in front view by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 moves to the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20). (See FIG. 21) in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction when viewed from the front, and as shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is at a position substantially intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position substantially halfway between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 makes the front plate portion 551 substantially upright, and The mounting plate 552 is set to be substantially horizontal. In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position substantially at the center of a rotatable range around the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, when the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, the driven member 560 causes the connection shaft 561b pushed down by the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 to move to the second position. The posture is set at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the range of displacement in the up-down direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 31 (b)), and at the rightmost position in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 30 (b)). It is located at a certain position. In addition, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (of the first pin 561a). (Arranged portion) is inclined toward the upper left side in the front view (the upper left side in FIG. 28A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position approximately at the center in a rotatable range around the connection shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front with the drive shaft 531 being rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 from the state shown in FIGS. When the crank pin 541 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Rotated in the counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise), the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position as shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located on the left side in front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (see FIG. ) Left side), whereby the driven member 550 tilts the distal end side (the portion where the drive groove 551a is formed) of the front plate portion 551 to the left side in front view (FIG. 32 (b) left side) and interposes it. The distal end side of the plate portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lowered downward (downward in FIG. 32B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotation position where the rotation ends in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, since the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 has the tip end side of the interposed plate portion 552 lowered as described above, the connection shaft 561b is connected to the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( 29 (b) (lower side). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at the lowest position in the up-down direction (FIG. 32 (b) up-down direction) and at the leftmost position in the left-right direction (FIG. 32 (b) left-right direction). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 is configured such that the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is located at the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 is provided. The first pin 561a is disposed in an upright posture with the first pin 561a facing upward (upward in FIG. 29A) when viewed from the front. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotation position that is a rotation end point in the clockwise (clockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is displaced by the displacement of the driven member 550. The driving member 550 can be driven while being relatively displaced. In other words, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shaft portions 533 and 554, and even when the driven member 550 is displaced along a fixed trajectory, the trajectory (displacement) differs from that of the driven member 550. The driven member 560 can be displaced. Further, such a change in the mode of the displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550. Therefore, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, the displacement is not affected. The driven member 560 can be displaced along a different trajectory (displacement mode) from the driven member 550. As a result, while the output of the drive motor 530 is kept constant, a change can be given to the mode of displacement of the driven member 560.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, means (displacement defining means) for relatively displacing the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 includes the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560, and the connection shaft 561b. That is, the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b are guided along the guide grooves 513 and 523, so that the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed according to the contour (shape) of each of the guide grooves 513 and 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by mechanical elements such as the guide groove and the shaft-like body guided by the guide groove, and the structure is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. Further, since a simple mechanical element can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable portion can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set. The degree of freedom of design when setting the mode can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily secure variations of the mode of the displacement that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, where the driven member 560 is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member 550, the first member 511 is mainly constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a and mainly regulates rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure which is constituted by the second guide groove 523 and the connection shaft 561b and mainly regulates the slide displacement are provided. This not only increases the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement, but also allows the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 to be of the first type even when there are a plurality of types (rotation and slide displacement). And the second guide structure can provide appropriate guidance. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

  Here, in the first guide structure described above, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the interposed plate portion 561 or the back plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the back case body 520, respectively. This is true even if the configuration is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing a displacement space for the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, so that they need not be formed to have relatively large outer shapes. And a dead space tends to be formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove 513 as the front case body 510, the dead space can be effectively used, and a sufficient space for forming the first guide groove 513 can be secured. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and extension length of the first guide groove 513, and accordingly, it is possible to increase the variation that can be given to the mode of displacement. Note that the second guide structure is the same as that of the first guide structure, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the rear case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the rear case body 520, so that the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed. Can be formed without considering each other's formation positions.

  That is, when forming both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 in the rear case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect. The degree of freedom in designing the contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the contour (shape) and the extension length are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the partner. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement can be increased accordingly.

  Next, the rotation operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rotary operation unit 600 has a spherical liquid crystal device 670 in which a ring-shaped first rotator 650 is disposed so as to surround the periphery thereof, and a back surface of the first rotator 650. A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in a front view is disposed concentrically on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotation speeds and in opposite directions.

  Here, with a conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it has been difficult for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product is a form in which each rotating body is independently rotated without being related to other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of the effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let it.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotators are rotated differently. Since the rotation is performed in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be easily associated with each other to be recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be exhibited. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. 35 and 36, illustration of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted. The cross section illustrated in FIG. 36 corresponds to a cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a rear case body 620 that form a skeleton thereof, a drive motor 630 disposed on the back side of the rear case body 620, A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 is transmitted via the plurality of gears. The first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 that are rotated after being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610 And a light-emitting device 680 disposed on the front.

  The front case body 610 and the rear case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, respectively.

  The front case body 610 and the rear case body 620 are formed with openings 611 and 621, respectively, which are circular when viewed from the front, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided so as to protrude toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 is set to the same size, and the main body 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Supported as possible. A second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (the main body 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner circumferential surface and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotatable. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with reference to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, the gears (first and second outer gears 653a and 661a) engraved on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotator 650 (storage flange 653) and the second rotator 660, and the front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 provided in the case body 610 can be defined based on the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and the driving resistance can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft and is mounted on the back of the rear case body 620, so that the pinion gear 631 is connected to the first storage gear 641 of the plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Mesh. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431, and as a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 Can be rotated respectively.

  The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a group of gears for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, as described above. The teeth are each formed as spur gears engraved on the outer peripheral surface parallel to the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610 and are connected in series (engagement) with each other, so that the first storage gear 641 is at the top and the fifth storage gear 641 is the fifth storage gear. One gear train (gear train) whose rear end is the gear 645 is formed.

  The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be rotatable synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are respectively fixed to one end and the other end of the rotation shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and these gears 645, 646 and the rotation shaft are integrally formed. Rotated.

  According to the gear group configured as described above, when the drive motor 630 is driven to rotate, the rotation driving force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first housing gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of a gear train (gear train), and the fifth gear 645 is rotated, whereby the front gear 646 is rotated.

  Here, as described later, the second outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotary body 650 (the housing flange portion 653) is mounted on the second housing gear 642, and the second outer circumferential gear 652 of the second rotary body 660 is mounted on the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are meshed with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated with the rotation of the drive motor 630. In other words, the two rotators (the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660) can be simultaneously rotated by the rotational drive of the one drive motor 630.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643, 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speed between the front gear 646 and the second housing gear 642 rotated in synchronization with the fifth housing gear 645 be made different, but also the rotation between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be different. The directions can be different. As a result, as described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction between the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 can be different from each other.

  In the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is provided on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is provided on the front side of the front case cheer 610, respectively. On the rear side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are respectively meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are disposed on the front side of the front case body 610, and these two gears 642, 646 mesh with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. As compared with the structure for performing the rotation, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. Can be simplified.

  Further, the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second storage gear 642 of the gear train meshes are arranged on the rear side of the front case body 610, so that the rotation is achieved. The gear train and the storage flange 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from a player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the housing flange 653 invisibly can be simply formed by using the rear case body 610 without the need to provide a separate member.

  The first rotating body 650 is an effect member for effecting by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrally formed on the main body 651 and one axial side of the main body 651. It mainly includes a front effect portion 652 to be formed, and a storage flange portion 653 fastened and fixed by screws to the other axial side (axial end surface) of the main body portion 651.

  The main body portion 651 is a cylindrical portion formed of a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) around the main body 651 as a rotation axis. Here, the detailed configuration of the main body 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651 showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 37 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the diameters of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b are schematically illustrated in an enlarged scale compared to the actual case, and the first protrusion 651a is also illustrated. An imaginary circle IS, which is an imaginary circle in which the tops of the second protruding portions 651b are inscribed, is shown using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), a first protruding portion 651a and a second protruding portion 651b are formed on the main body portion 651, and a position corresponding to the second protruding portion 651b is , An offset portion 651c is formed.

  The first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are formed so as to protrude from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651, respectively, and extend along the axial direction of the main body 651 (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 37A). While extending over the entire length of the main body 651 (see FIG. 35), and at a plurality of locations (eight in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the first projection 651a and the second projection The portions 651b are formed by being alternately scattered in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a columnar body having a circular cross section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the axial direction matches the main body 651, and It is formed by a portion (a part of the cylindrical body) of the buried cylindrical body that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651. The second protrusion 651b is the same as the first protrusion 651a, except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

  As described above, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b that protrude from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651 are extended along the entire length of the main body 651 in the axial direction. 651 can be increased in rigidity.

  The second protruding portion 651b extends further in the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface in FIG. 37B). Therefore, as described later, when the storage flange 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body 651 with screws, the axially extending portion of the second protrusion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange 653. The main body 651 and the housing flange 653 can be firmly connected to each other so that they cannot rotate relative to each other (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the portion where the second projecting portion 651b is formed in the main body portion 651 is offset toward the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second projecting portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body 651 when viewed in the axial direction of the main body 651 shown in FIG. Since the offset portion 651c is formed in the main body 651 in this manner, the axis of the second protrusion 651b can be offset and positioned toward the axis as described later, and the entire main body 651 can be positioned. The rigidity can be increased.

  The plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the first protrusions 651a have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the second protrusions 652b are The amount of protrusion of the main body 651 from the outer peripheral surface is set to be the same as each other, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is also made equal by the offset by the offset portion 651c. A plurality (eight in the present embodiment) of the first protrusions 651a and the second protrusions 652b have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 37B, the virtual circle IS in which the tops of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 652b are inscribed can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter of the virtual circle IS is set to a size equivalent to or slightly larger than the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, when the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact areas thereof are changed to the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion. Since the contact resistance can be limited to each top portion of the main body 651, the main body 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612.

  In particular, the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are arc-shaped when viewed in the axial direction (specifically, arc-shaped in which a cross-section taken along a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body 651 is convex outward). ), So that not only the contact area can be suppressed, but also the tops of the first and second protrusions 651a and 651b smoothly contact the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, even when there is backlash due to dimensional tolerance, the main body 651 can be more smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b not only protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 but also protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651. Thus, when the main body 651 is molded using a resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and its moldability can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the main body 651 shown in FIG. 37B, the first protruding portion 651a is configured such that the first protruding portion 651a protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 and the main body 651 Of the portion formed to protrude from the inner peripheral surface are the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of a portion formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c is the same as the projecting dimension of a portion formed to project from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body portion 651 is made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the formability thereof can be further secured.

  Further, a hole having a circular cross section is formed in the second protruding portion 651b along the axial direction over the entire length (see FIG. 36). Thus, the thickness of the second protruding portion 651b having a larger diameter than that of the first protruding portion 651a can be made uniform with other portions (the main body 651, the offset portion 651c, the first protruding portion 651a, and the like). As a result, the moldability of the main body 651 can be ensured.

  In this case, a female screw is cut into the inner peripheral surface of the hole formed in the second protrusion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, since the second protrusion 651b having a relatively large diameter serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be secured. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and since the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is enhanced, the connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 is formed by the second protruding portion 651b. By carrying, both can be firmly connected and durability can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. The front presentation portion 652 is a portion visually recognized as a presentation portion by a player, and is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 in a flange shape. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652 is plated to give the front effect portion 652 an appearance simulating a glossy metal. The front effect portion 652 is made of a light transmissive resin material, but is plated so that the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) is visible to the player through the front effect portion 652. Can be avoided.

  The shape of the front presentation portion 652 in a front view is a saw blade shape in which irregular shaped peaks (second portions) and valleys (first portions) are repeated along the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, 16 pieces are formed. The peaks (valleys) are arranged at irregular intervals (unequal pitch) in the circumferential direction. As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front effect unit 652 sequentially pass through the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680, so that the player emits light. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical portion of the front case body 610. It is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the main body 651 inserted through the opening 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, as described above, the screw inserted into the storage flange 653 is screwed into the second protrusion 651b of the main body 651, whereby the storage flange 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body 651.

  The storage flange portion 653 has a thickness dimension set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the facing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension of the front case body 610 and the rear case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back of the storage flange 653 into contact with the back of the front case body 610 or the front of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first outer peripheral gear 653a has a second storage part of the above-described gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. The gear 642 meshes. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the housing flange 653 via the second housing gear 642 and the first outer gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 is rotated. Rotated.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and is provided in the opening 511 of the front case body 610 along the peripheral edge of the gear train. Since the second storage gear 642 meshes with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 can be simplified. In particular, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the projection surface 671 of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side, it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral side. Becomes Therefore, it is effective that the above-described transmission structure can be provided on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  In addition, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (the main body 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 is provided. The position can be defined based on the front case body 610. Therefore, the position between the gear (first outer gear 653 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange 653) and the second housing gear 642 arranged on the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined based on the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing condition between the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second housing gear 642 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotator 660 is an effect member for performing an effect by rotating on the back side of the first rotator 650 (see FIG. 33), and has a cylindrical main body formed of a light-transmitting resin material. 661 and a front effect portion 662 integrally formed on the axial end surface of the main body portion 661.

  The inner diameter of the main body 661 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610, and is fitted to the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612). By inserting the cylindrical portion 612 through the inner peripheral side of the main body portion 661), it is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer gear 661a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the second outer gear 661a meshes with the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front of the front case body 610. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 described above are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation is performed. The body 660 is rotated.

  As described above, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed in front of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Thus, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving motor 630 to the second rotating body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a tubular shape and is rotatably held by being externally fitted to the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. It will be difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective that the above-described transmission structure can be provided on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the disposition position of the second rotating body 660 is changed to the front case body. 610 can be defined as a reference. Accordingly, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed on the front case body 610 will be described. Can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state between the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed.

  The main body 661 has its axial dimension set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front of the front case body 610 and the back of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 makes one end face in the axial direction or the other end face in the axial direction of the main body part 661 abut on the back surface of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front face of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  The main body 661 is provided with a front protruding ridge 661b and a rear protruding ridge 661c protruding from one end surface in the axial direction and the other end surface in the axial direction. The front convex ridge 661b is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and the rear convex ridge 661c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape in a front view at a plurality of locations. Accordingly, when rotating the first rotating body 660, the frictional resistance between the main body 661 and the front case 610 and the second rotating body 650 (the front rendering section 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The front rendering unit 662 is located on the back side of the front rendering unit 652 in the first rotating body 650, is a part that is visually recognized by the player together with the rendering unit 652, and extends radially from the outer peripheral surface of the main body unit 661. It is formed to protrude outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregular shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along a circumferential direction, and an annular shape in a front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral portion 662a. And an inner peripheral side portion 662b.

  The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 is plated in the same manner as the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the above-described first rotating body 650, plating is applied to the entire surface (entire range) of the front rendering unit 652, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front rendering unit 662 is plated. And the inner peripheral side portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as described later, the peak (second portion) and the valley (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680. In order to allow the player to view the light-emitting element 681 intermittently and selectively, the light-emitting element 681 is watermarked through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 (that is, the portion that is not plated). Thus, it is possible for the player to visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light-transmitting material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device that projects an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface 671 is housed. And allows the player to visually recognize an image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection target surface portion 671. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the rear case body 620, and the projection surface portion 671 projects substantially half of the spherical shell forward from the front of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 in the upright posture (see FIG. 33).

  The light-emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in a front view, which is externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board housed in the case body 681, and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. And a plurality of (12 in this embodiment) light-emitting elements 682 arranged (mounted) on the side, and in a state of assembly, the front rendering portions 652 and 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. 662 is provided on the rear side.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having outer shapes larger than the light emitting elements 682 are formed at twelve places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the light-emitting device 680, when viewed from the front, the light-emitting element 682 is exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and the light emitted from the light-emitting element 682 is transmitted through the opening of the case body 681 to the front side (first rotation). Irradiation can be performed toward the front rendering units 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  On the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, as described above, the front rendering units 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are disposed, and the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotator 650 is provided. Is rotated, so that light emission by the light emitting element 682 can be intermittently and selectively made visible to the player. Here, a structure in which light emission of the light emitting element 682 is intermittently and selectively made visible to the player will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b) show a state in which the first rotary bodies 650 are arranged at different rotational positions. FIG. 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a rotary operation unit 600 along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38 (b). FIG.

  In FIG. 38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 of the rotating operation unit 600 and Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the radial position relationship between the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. 38 schematically shows a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the shape of the front rendering portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 in a front view is such that irregularly shaped peaks (second portions) and valleys (first portions) are repeated along the circumferential direction. The light emitting element 682 in the light emitting device 680 is located radially outside (the upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) the valley bottom in the light emitting device 680 and in the light emitting device 680. The radial position (the vertical position in FIG. 39 (a)) is set radially inward (FIG. 39 (a) lower side) from the peak.

  In this case, as described above, the front (front) plating is not applied to the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front directing portion 662 of the second rotating body 660, and light is transmitted therethrough. The formation range of the peripheral portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the bottom of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, when viewed from the front, light is emitted from a valley portion in the front rendering section 652 of the first rotating body 650 via the inner peripheral side portion 662b in the front rendering section 662 of the second rotating body 660 (that is, transmitted). The light emitting element 682 of the device 680 can be visually recognized by a player.

  Further, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance simulating a glossy metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662 a is disposed to face the rear side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in a front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  As described above, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the peaks and the valleys are formed alternately in the circumferential direction on the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 in a front view. As the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, so that the light emitting element 682 emits light. Through the inner peripheral portion 662b of the front effect portion 682, the player can intermittently visually recognize the player. Thus, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be effectively performed.

  Further, the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance simulating a glossy metal, and the front (front) side of the outer peripheral portion 662a is provided. , A front effect unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 is provided. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are rotated in directions opposite to each other, the first rotator 650 passes through the valley portion in the front rendering section 652 of the first rotator 650. The player can visually recognize a mode in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two rotators 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  That is, according to the rotating operation unit 600, the player who looks at the first rotating body 650 in front can intermittently visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front effect portion 652. On the summit side of the front and rear production unit 652 in the mountain and valley shape, the front production unit 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front production unit 652 (mountain and valley shape) of the first rotary body 650. Can be visually recognized. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 in association with each other, and as a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). Can be effectively performed.

  Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, the valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed at 16 locations in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are connected to the circumferential direction 12. Since the light-emitting elements 682 are arranged at the locations, the player can selectively visually recognize only the specific light-emitting elements 682 among the light-emitting elements 682 arranged at the twelve locations.

  That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect part 652 and the circumferential spacing of the light-emitting elements 682 are different from each other. For example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is made visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect portion 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. As shown in (), a different light emitting element 682 is selected, and the light emitting elements 682 disposed at four places on the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left are made visible.

  This allows not only the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 to be viewed intermittently, but also the position of the light emitting element 682 to be viewed to be changed in the circumferential direction, so that the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and The effect of rotating each of the second rotating bodies 660) can be performed more effectively.

  Returning from FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 is formed separately from the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 is fixed to the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. In addition, the second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

  That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body 651 into the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the rear surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the rear case body 620, respectively, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both the case bodies 610, 620 is formed. To the front side (front) and the back side (rear).

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by being fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotator 660 (the front ridge 661b and the rear ridge 662c) abuts on the back of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 and the front of the case 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. Thereby, the displacement of the second rotating body 660 with respect to both the case bodies 610 and 620 toward the front side (front) and the back side (rear) can be restricted.

  As described above, according to the rotating operation unit 600, the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself can be held while the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state. Also serves as a portion that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, so that the structure can be simplified accordingly. In addition, a holding structure that allows a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) to be held in a rotatable state is fixed by fastening the housing flange 653 to the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650. Since it can be formed only by performing the steps, the assembly process can be simplified. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the opening 621 is formed in the rear case body 620, a plurality of rotating bodies are formed in the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the rotation operation is performed simply by mounting the spherical liquid crystal device 670 from the back side of the back case body 620 and fastening and fixing the same. The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotating bodies 650 and 660 in another process. Therefore, this point can also contribute to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In the projecting operation unit 400 in the above-described embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base displacement member 440 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably provided with respect to 440. That is, the first operation is to rotate the proximal displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotational position (see FIG. 14), as in the case of the above-described embodiment. A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and an extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

  Also according to this configuration, the base-side displacement member 450 at the retreat position is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is arranged at the overhang position by the second operation. The player can sufficiently visually recognize the entire displacement members 440 and 450, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited, while the relative displacement member 450 at the extended position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation, and By disposing the base-side displacement member 440 at the rotation position to the retracted position by the first operation, the entire displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, and the space required for accommodating the displacement members is suppressed. it can.

  In the protruding operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the front end side of the base side displacement member 450 is higher than the front end side of the relative displacement member 450. The case where the projecting member is projected to the decorative member 480 side (the upper side in FIG. 17B) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Conversely, the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 is A configuration may be adopted in which the projection protrudes toward the decorative member 480 (the upper side in FIG. 17B) from the distal end side.

  Also according to this configuration, the rotation trajectories of the two displacement members 440 and 450 intersect with the decoration member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decoration member 480 can be transmitted and the two displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The effect produced by displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when projecting the relative displacement member 450 (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located on the front (front) can be further increased, and the force can be further increased. Improvement can be achieved.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 is formed in the shape of a long hole, so that the driven member 560 (connection shaft 561b) can rotate according to the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a). In addition, the case where the connection is performed in a state where the connection can be slid and displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driven member 550 (the connection groove 552a) can be formed by forming the connection groove 552a in a circular shape. A configuration in which the sliding displacement of the 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be adopted. According to this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. Can be changed to enhance the effect.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is meshed with a gear disposed concentrically with the driven member 560 with the connection shaft 561b and the gear. It may be constituted by a curved rack gear formed along an arc centered on the drive shaft 551a of the driven member 550 and disposed on the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by the gear rolling on the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, and the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are respectively inserted through the guide grooves 513 and 523. The case where the one pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed on the driven member 560. 560, and a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) to be inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided in the front case body 510 and / or the rear case body 520. May be. According to this configuration, the driven member 560 can be caused to perform a combined motion of the linear motion and the rotational motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed, The effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above-described embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is pierced (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide groove 513 is not limited to this. May be formed as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, for example. That is, the first guide groove 513 is only required to have a shape capable of guiding the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extend, while the connection groove 551a is extended linearly has been described. The first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are extended linearly while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Is also good. In particular, a case has been described in which the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are set to have a constant radius of curvature, but the present invention is not limited to this. Obviously, it is possible to adopt a different shape (for example, an S-shape). This makes it possible to change the trajectory of the driven member 560 more complicatedly, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set in an arc shape, the driven member 550 sets the arc shape to the rotation start end in the rotation direction about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Alternatively, it is preferable to make the radius larger than the reference value (reduce the curvature) in the state of being located at the end and in the vicinity thereof. That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second range of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the vicinity thereof is larger than the reference value, or the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is larger than the reference value. Preferably, the radius is larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. Thus, in the initial stage of starting driving the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is made invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is formed. Is first exposed from the area of the front case body 510 (made visible) to the entire driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (made visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the operation of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced without affecting the effect, and in the latter case, Since the movement of the driven member 560 can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded from the front case body 510, the effect that the driven member 560 suddenly appears from the front case body 510 or the driven member 560 is removed from the front case body 510. You can perform the effect of quickly hiding behind the back.

  Alternatively, when the driven member 560 is in a horizontal posture (when viewed in the direction of the connection shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)), the decoration is performed within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines that are vertically inclined at 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561b. (The position where the center of gravity of the portion 562 is located), the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal position, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where it is relatively necessary to support the own weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 by the driving force of the driving motor 530, the radius is increased, and the n-friction resistance and the driven An area where the influence of the inertial force due to the change in the posture of the member 560 can be reduced and the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced, but the weight of the driven member 560 (action of gravity) need not be supported by the drive force of the drive motor 530. By reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the effect.

  In the rotary operation unit 600 according to the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the main body 651 and the front rendering unit 652 are integrated with the first rotating body 650, and the storage flange 653 is provided separately. However, a configuration in which the first rotating body 650 is formed by integrating the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 and separately forming the front effect portion 652 may be adopted. According to this configuration, as in the case of the above embodiment, the structure for rotatably holding the plurality of rotating bodies and the assembly process can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case has been described where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) being a flat surface. Instead, a part or the whole of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. As other shapes, for example, a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a cross-sectional waveform, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface in which these are combined are exemplified. When these other shapes are employed, not only can light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral portion 662b be diffusely reflected or refracted, but also due to the rotation of the second rotating body 660, the diffused reflection and refraction can be prevented. Since the movement can be given in the direction of refraction, the effect can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 according to the above-described embodiment, the case has been described where the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in front view. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps with the entire front gear 646 in a front view. Thus, the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect unit 662, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. If the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a larger-diameter gear, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, a change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 with respect to the first rotating body 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 is omitted, but the following configuration may be adopted. In other words, the shape of the ridge in at least one or both of the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 or the second rotator 660 is formed in such a size that the front gear 646 can be shielded when viewed from the front. The rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at the phase position where the shape portion is disposed in front of the front gear 646. Thus, when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Operation Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. A relative position formed between the base-side displacement member and a reference position and a projecting position projecting outward from the base-side displacement member relative to the reference position and from the reference position. A displacement member, and a first operation of rotating the base-side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotation position; and moving the relative displacement member relative to the base-side displacement member in the reference position and the extended position. And a second operation of displacing the game machine between the game machines A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been known a gaming machine which performs an effect by rotating a displacement member around a rotatably supported base end side (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-92634). For example, paragraphs 0175 to 0189, see FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the tip side of the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in the opposite direction to the one direction. By rotating the displacement member in another direction, the displacement member is retracted outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device (retreat position). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it becomes difficult for the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the effect of the effect is sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, if the displacement member has a large outer shape, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retreat position). The gaming machine A1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and allows the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the evacuation position. It is intended to provide a gaming machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member includes a base displacement member rotatably formed between the retreat position and the rotation position, a reference position and the reference position provided at the base displacement member. A relative displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between a projecting position projecting outward from the proximal displacement member, and a first operation of rotating the proximal displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position; And the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member with respect to the base-side displacement member between the reference position and the overhang position can be performed, so that the base-side displacement member at the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When disposing the relative displacement member at the reference position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is disposed at the extension position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be extended outward from the proximal displacement member. Therefore, the displacement member can be enlarged as much as a whole, so that the player can sufficiently recognize the displacement member at the rotation position, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

  On the other hand, when disposing the base-side displacement member at the rotation position to the retracted position by the first operation, the relative-displacement member based on the extended position is disposed at the reference position by the second operation, so that the base member of the relative-displacement member is moved. An outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement member can be reduced in size as a whole, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement member at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other components and devices.

  Note that the second operation may be performed at least until the device is arranged at the evacuation position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least a part of the first operation and at least a part of the second operation may be executed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is disposed forward of a plane of movement of the displacement member and has an opening formed therein. When the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at a rotation position by a first operation, the relative displacement is reduced. At least a part of the member is made visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and when the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the relative displacement member has A gaming machine A2 in which an area visible to a player via an opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotating motion (first operation), and the relative displacement thereof is changed. Making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, and then perform an effect of expanding the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member by linear motion (second operation). Can be.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base-side displacement member, and the second operation is to move the relative displacement member to the reference position and overhang with respect to the base-side displacement member. A gaming machine A3 characterized by sliding displacement between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed so as to be slidable on the proximal displacement member, and the second operation is to move the relative displacement member relative to the proximal displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the extended position, for example, the relative displacement member is extended from the reference position as compared with a case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated with respect to the base side displacement member. The space required for displacing to the outgoing position can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other components or devices can be secured accordingly. Also, since the mode of displacement of the relative displacement member by the second operation can be made different from the mode of displacement of the base-side displacement member by the first operation, the effect of performing the first operation and the second operation. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed in the base side displacement member in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other, and the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of each other. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed on the base-side displacement member in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other, and the direction of the slide displacement is relative to each other. Since the direction is set along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by sliding displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base-side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotation position, the displacement member is enlarged as a whole by extension, so that the player can sufficiently recognize the displacement member, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, in the retracted position, the space required for housing the displacement member can be reduced by shortening the displacement member as a whole by shortening, and the space for disposing other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member retracted to the retreat position is first made to appear from the side in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member is provided. In addition to making the player visually recognize only the relative displacement member, the player makes the player directly view the second member by a linear motion (second operation), thereby extending an area in which the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member. be able to. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by a motion mode (linear motion) different from the motion mode at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the unexpected area due to the change of the motion mode and the visual area can be expanded by the linear motion. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to being performed, and a sense of unity of the composite operation due to the combination of these being performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved in a mode in which the relative displacement member protrudes and retracts from the opening of the front member only by a linear motion (a mode in which the relative displacement member reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position).

  In the gaming machine A4, there is provided a transmission unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A4, the game machine A4 further includes a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member. Since it is disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the disposing space for the transmission means.

  The gaming machine A5 includes a holding member that holds the driving unit, the transmitting unit, and the displacement member. The driving unit and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member, and the displacement member has a longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A6, wherein the gaming machine A6 is disposed at the retreat position in a posture in which the driving means is positioned on an extension of the line.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are provided on one surface side of the holding member. The size in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced as compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively provided. Further, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive means is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive means can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as the evacuation position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there is provided a transmitting unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and a holding member for holding the transmitting unit, and the transmitting member is configured to drive the driving unit. A rotating member rotated by receiving a force, a predetermined position between one side position and the other side position is eccentrically rotated from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. A link member that is rotatably supported and the other side position is connected to a relative displacement member of the displacement member, wherein the rotating member is rotated between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, The first operation is performed by rotating the base-side displacement member via the relative displacement member of the displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the rotation member is moved between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. When rotated between Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and rotates the one-side position to the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation of the rotation member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the rotation of the rotation member is transmitted to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. Can be transmitted. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base-side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member with the displacement of the link member, Can perform actions. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced with respect to the base side displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation Can be executed. That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by one driving unit, so that the component cost is reduced. The cost can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the transmission means may be provided with a gear at one side position of the link member, meshing the gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member with the gear, and displacing the link member. The space required for disposing the members and the link members increases. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotation member, so that the rotation member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in a front view, The space required for disposing the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed by using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the base displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position at least partially overlapping in a front view. A gaming machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decoration member are viewed from the front. Partially intersect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is configured such that one side in the longitudinal direction of the base-side displacement member is a rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement member is in a longitudinal direction relative to the front side of the base-side displacement member. Is disposed so as to be slidably displaced along the second movement, the second operation is to slidably displace the relative displacement member between the reference position and the extended position with respect to the base-side displacement member, When the base member is rotated by the first operation, at least a part of the displacement trajectory on the rotation distal end side of the displacement member when the base member is rotated overlaps in a front view, and the base member is rotated by the first operation. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotation position, the overlap with the displacement member in a front view is not formed, and the relative displacement member is such that the rotation center side is closer to the front side than the rotation tip side. Gaming machine A9, characterized in that are location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base-side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation tip side is formed so as to be recessed to the back side, when the base-side displacement member is rotated by the first operation, the contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member can be suppressed. In this case, the one side of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member is used as the rotation center in the first operation. Therefore, the rotation end side, which is a free end, easily swings back and forth during the first operation, and comes into contact with the decorative member. Is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slid from the reference position to the extended position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base-side displacement member is positioned such that the center of rotation is closer to the front than the tip of rotation. With the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be arranged more forward (side closer to the player) by that amount, and the force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side with respect to the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member may be any shape between the rotation tip side and the rotation center side, for example, It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed linearly or continuously and gradually.

  In any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, a pin member provided on one of the base-side displacement member or the relative displacement member and a pin member provided on the other of the base-side displacement member or the relative displacement member can be slidably displaced. A slide groove for receiving and allowing the relative displacement member to slide relative to the base side displacement member, wherein a position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is more relative to the pin member than the pin member. A gaming machine A10, which is located at a tip end side in a sliding direction of a displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position at which the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is closer to the distal end in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member than the pin member. Therefore, the position where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be closer to the distal end side of the relative displacement member in the sliding direction. In other words, the position where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be kept away from the position where the base-side displacement member is supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from swinging in the front-rear direction.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Composite Operation Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that displaceably holds the driven member. A driven member that is displaceably connected to the driven member; and a displacement defining unit that defines a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. A displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member is determined by the displacement defining unit. The gaming machine B1 wherein the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, by a driving force from a driving means, for example, an overhang position which becomes a front surface of a liquid crystal display device and an overhang position from the overhang position. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position and a retracted position retracted in a direction outside a display area of the device is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-200790 (for example, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to FIG. 15)). According to this gaming machine, by changing the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent, a change is given to the mode of displacement of the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the output of the driving unit is changed, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced in accordance with the change of the output of the driving unit. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement. The gaming machine B1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can change the mode of displacement of a displacement member while keeping the output of a driving unit constant. I do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving unit, the displacement defining unit defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, thereby displacing the driven member. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a fixed trajectory such as a straight line or an arc, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from the driven member. In addition, since the change in the mode of the displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced on the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member and the holding member, and the other of the driven member and the holding member guided along the first groove. And a first guided part formed in the game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove, The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be defined. Thus, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, whereby the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the first groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped portion (first groove portion) and the portion guided by the portion (first guided portion), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state, when the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member, The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong impression change as a change in the mode of displacement.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner, so that the driven member is relatively moved with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only can the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by sliding displacement. Variations of the change that can be provided can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes a second groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the second groove. And a second guided portion formed in the game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is connected to the driven member so as to be rotatable and slidably displaceable, the guide structure based on the combination of the first groove and the first guided portion and the combination of the second groove and the second guided portion are used. By providing both the guide structure and the guide structure, not only can the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement be increased, but even if the displaceable direction of the driven member with respect to the driven member becomes Since the guide can be provided by the guide structure, unstable displacement can be suppressed, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5 also, similarly to the case described above, the groove defining portion (the second groove portion) and the portion guided by the groove portion (the second guided portion) constitute the displacement defining means. Can be simplified, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in a driven member, and the driven member is configured such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slidable. A groove-shaped connection groove portion that is inserted in a possible state, and the second guided portion is inserted into the connection groove portion so that the driven member is rotatable and slidably displaceable in the driven member. A gaming machine B6 which is connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the second groove is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is formed in the driven member. Since the driven member is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member by being inserted into the connection groove, the driven member is held by being guided by the second groove to the second guided portion. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted into the connection groove can be combined. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, in the holding member, at least a portion where the second groove is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is connected to the second groove of the holding member. A game machine B7 comprising: a contact portion abutting on a peripheral edge of the second guided portion; and the contact portion is formed in a circular shape concentric with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes a contact portion that is in contact with the periphery of the second groove of the holding member, and the contact portion is the second guided portion. The contact area between the contact portion and the holding portion (peripheral edge of the second groove portion) even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove portion). , The change of the supporting reaction force can be suppressed. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, in the holding member, the driven member can be displaced by a driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The gaming machine B8 is formed so as to be able to hold the driving means, the driven member and the driven member in the following condition.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member allows the driven member to be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the holding member is capable of displacing the driven member. Accordingly, the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state where the driven member can be displaced. Therefore, one device in which the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are held by the holding member. As a unit. This can reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the gaming machine by assembling the unit to the gaming machine body.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the first groove is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first groove is formed. Space can be easily secured. That is, a space for forming the first groove is provided by utilizing a dead space of the holding member, which has to be formed into a relatively large outer shape in order to hold and form a unit by holding the driving means, the driven member and the driven member. Can be secured. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and extension length of the first groove portion can be increased, and accordingly, the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove formed in the holding member in a groove shape, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member while being guided along the second groove. Wherein the holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion or the second facing portion. The gaming machine B10, wherein the second groove is formed in the other of the first facing portion and the second facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other across the driven member, and the other is formed. Since the second groove is formed in the first groove, the first groove and the second groove can be formed without considering the formation position of the partner. That is, when forming both the first groove portion and the second groove portion in one of the first opposing portion and the second opposing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove portion and the second groove portion so as not to intersect. , The degree of freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both the first groove portion and the second groove portion, the contour (shape) and the extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the opponent. The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation of change that can be given to the mode of displacement can be increased accordingly.

  The gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, wherein at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at a start end or an end that is larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the load is reduced at the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member in the stopped state by the driving means, and the driving is smoothly performed. Can be started.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a shielding member that shields the driven member invisibly is provided, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a part of the driven member outside a region of the shielding member. A gaming machine B12, wherein a radius in a corresponding area from the start of exposure to the driven member until the entire driven member is exposed outside the shielding member is smaller than a reference value.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member is shielded, so that the driven member An effect in which the member suddenly appears or an effect in which the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.
<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the rotating operation unit 600 is an example>
A holding member; a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably disposed on the holding member; and a driving unit for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape, and is fitted concentrically with the first rotating body.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (for example, paragraph 0162, see FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged to be separated from each other in the left and right directions are synchronously rotated in the same direction, respectively, so that the production has a sense of unity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged left and right apart, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations in association with each other and to rotate the plurality of rotating bodies. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is provided in order to solve the above-described problems. The rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies is associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize the rotation, and an effect is produced by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently exhibiting the effects of the above.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, since the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is fitted concentrically to the first rotating body, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are connected to each other. Can be rotated concentrically. As a result, the rotation of the first rotator and the rotation of the second rotator can be associated with each other to be easily recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of the effect by rotating each of the plurality of rotators can be sufficiently exhibited. Can be.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that an effect member or the like can be arranged on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotator surrounding the effect member and the second rotator surrounding the first rotator around the effect member. As a result, the effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body inserted into the holding member, a one-side flange protruding outward in a flange shape on one axial side of the main body, And a second flange that protrudes outward on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange portion and faces the first flange portion with the holding member interposed therebetween. A gaming machine C3, which is externally fitted to a main body of the first rotating body and is disposed between a flange on one side of the first rotating body and a holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed and held on one side and the other side in the axial direction of the main body and the main body inserted into the holding member. A second rotating body is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body, and the first rotating body has one side flange and a holding member. Therefore, the structure for holding the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body of the first rotating body is inserted into the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. In addition, since the other side flange portion of the first rotator abuts on the holding member, the displacement of the first rotator in one axial direction can be regulated, and the one side flange portion of the first rotator is rotated by the second rotation portion. The first rotating body can be restricted from moving in the other axial direction by being in contact with the body and the second rotating body being in contact with the holding member.

  Further, since the second rotator is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotator, the second rotator can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body of the first rotator. In addition, the second rotating body abuts on one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body abuts on the holding member, so that one side in the axial direction of the second rotating body. Can be regulated, and the displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the second rotating body with the holding member.

  In the gaming machine C3, a first gear and a second gear are provided on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. A gaming machine C4, wherein a gear meshed with the first gear and the second gear is engraved on an outer peripheral surface of the body and the second rotating body, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member and transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided with gears meshed with the first gear and the second gear on the outer peripheral surface, respectively. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a rendering member or the like is provided on the inner peripheral side of the main body, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, a structure that meshes with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is provided on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is provided on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side, and the first gear is provided. Is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the second gear is provided on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is provided on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. The first gear is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. The first gear and the second gear are compared with a case where both the first gear and the second gear are meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body on one side of the holding member, for example. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gear can be simplified.

  Also, the first gear, the other flange of the first rotating body meshed with the first gear, the one flange of the first rotating body, the main body, and the second rotating body are disposed. By being disposed on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body are provided to the player who views the one side of the holding member from the front. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure for invisiblely shielding the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body can be simplified using the holding member.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 and C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear A gaming machine C6 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, are provided. The one rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, for example, even when two rotators are rotated by one driving unit, the two rotators (first rotation The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be made different. As a result, the effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion formed in a cylindrical shape and protruding to the one side, and the first member is provided on an inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A gaming machine C7, wherein a main body portion of a rotating body is rotatably disposed on an outer peripheral side of a cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member has a cylindrical portion formed in a cylindrical shape and protruding to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member. The main body of the first rotator is rotatably disposed on the inner peripheral side of the portion, and the second rotator is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thereby, the arrangement positions of the first rotator and the second rotator can be defined based on the holding member, respectively, so that the gears engraved on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotator and the second rotator, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member can be defined based on the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement between the gears engraved on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body with the first gear and the second gear. As a result, uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed, and drive resistance can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotator includes a plurality of protrusions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body, extend in the axial direction of the main body, and are scattered at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A gaming machine C8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the main body of the first rotating body is protruded from the outer peripheral surface of the main body, extends in the axial direction of the main body, and has a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since a plurality of protrusions are provided, the contact area between the main body of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the protrusion, and the main body of the first rotating body is The rotation can be smoothly performed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  It is preferable that the protruding portion be curved in an arc shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut along a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion is outwardly convex. Since the contact area between the cylindrical portion of the holding member and the inner peripheral surface is suppressed, the main body of the first rotating body can be more smoothly rotated on the inner circumferential side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotator is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotator protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. A gaming machine C9 comprising a plurality of inward protrusions disposed at positions in phase with the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body is projected from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. And a plurality of inner protruding portions disposed at positions that are in phase with the protruding portions (that is, on the rear surface side of the region where the protruding portions are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and its moldability can be ensured. .

  In the gaming machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened to positions corresponding to the protrusions. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has a main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are projected portions. In other words, since the protrusions also serve as screw fastening portions for fastening screws, the strength of the screw fastening portions can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one rotation locus of the first rotator or the second rotator in a front view and formed to be capable of emitting light. A gaming machine C11 comprising: a light emitting unit.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one of the first and second rotating bodies in the front view. When the first rotator and the second rotator are concentrically rotated, light emission by the illuminator on the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator is provided. Can be visually recognized. That is, the effect of rotating the first rotator and the second rotator can be performed at a position overlapping with the light emission by the light emitting means. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotators can be more effectively performed. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator has a first portion in which the light emitting unit is formed so as to be visible in a region where a rotation trajectory overlaps the light emitting unit in a front view. A gaming machine C12, wherein a second portion in which the light emitting means is invisible is arranged alternately in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body allows the light emitting means to be visually recognized in a region where the rotation trajectory overlaps the light emitting means in a front view. Since the first portion to be formed and the second portion in which the light emitting means are invisible are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. Since the portion and the second portion alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be intermittently visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of relating the intermittent light emission of the light emitting means to the rotation while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. As a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies respectively. Can be performed more effectively.

  The gaming machine K1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine K3 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, a variable display unit for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
60 Base plate (front member)
86 Center frame (front member)
410 Case body (holding member)
420 drive motor (drive means)
431 Pinion gear (part of transmission means)
432 Intermediate gear (part of transmission means)
433 Crank gear (part of transmission means, rotating member)
440 Base displacement member (part of displacement member)
444 second slide hole (slide groove)
450 Relative displacement member (part of displacement member)
453 slide pin (pin member)
460 Connecting rod (part of transmission means, link member)
480 Decoration member 510 Front case body (part of holding member, shielding member)
513 First guide groove (first groove, part of displacement regulating means)
523 Second guide groove (second groove, part of displacement regulating means)
520 Back case body (part of holding member, shielding member)
530 drive motor (drive means)
550 Driven member 552a Connection groove (connection groove, part of displacement regulating means)
560 driven member (displacement member)
561a First pin (first guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
561b Connecting shaft (second guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
563a Contact surface (contact part)
610 Front case body (part of holding member)
612 Cylindrical part 620 Back case body (part of holding member)
630 drive motor (drive means)
631 pinion gear (part of first transmission means, part of second transmission means)
641 first storage gear (part of first transmission means, part of second transmission means)
642 Second storage gear (first gear)
643 Third storage gear (part of second transmission means)
644 fourth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
645 Fifth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
646 Front gear (2nd gear)
650 First rotator 651 Body 651a First protrusion (part of protrusion, inner protrusion)
651b Second protrusion (part of protrusion, inner protrusion)
652 Front directing part (one side flange part, first part and second part)
653 Storage flange (other side flange)
653a First outer peripheral gear (gear carved on outer peripheral surface of first rotating body)
660 Second rotator 661a Second outer peripheral gear (gear carved on outer peripheral surface of second rotator)
670 Spherical liquid crystal device (production member)
682 Light emitting element (light emitting means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force from a driving unit causes, for example, an overhanging position to be a front surface of the liquid crystal display device and a display of the liquid crystal display device from the overhanging position. 2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retreat position and a retreat position where the retreat member is retreated in a direction outside a region (Patent Document 1). According to this gaming machine, by changing the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent, a change is given to the mode of displacement of the displacement member.

JP 2011-200790 A (see, for example, paragraph 0095, FIGS. 11 to 15)

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the output of the driving unit is changed, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced in accordance with the change of the output of the driving unit. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the mode of displacement of a displacement member while keeping the output of a driving unit constant. .

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, a driven member that is displaced by being driven by the driving force generated by the driving unit, and a driven member that is displaced by the driving unit. holding means for displaceably holding, which comprises, includes the a driven member connected displaceably to the driven member, a displacement defining means for defining the displacement with respect to the holding means of the driven member, wherein by displacement with respect to the holding means of the driven member is defined by the displacement regulating means, wherein the driving force of said driving means when the driven member is displaced, the driven member relative to the driven member The first member is relatively displaced, and the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape in the first member, a first guided portion guided along the first groove by the displacement of the driven member, Formed in grooves on members A second groove portion, and a second guided portion guided along the second groove portion by the displacement of the driven member, wherein the holding unit includes the first member and the second member. Prepare .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according while the output of the drive motion means constant, can give a change in mode of displacement of the driven member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit in a state where the proximal displacement member and the relative displacement member are arranged at the retracted position. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the transmission means in front view typically. It is the front schematic diagram which showed the transmission means in front view typically. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the protruding operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit in portion XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a driven member and a driven member, and (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface of the driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, and (b) is a back surface of the driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVI in FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of a driven member and a driven member showing a relationship with a second guide groove. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a longitudinal section of a rotation operation unit. (A) is a rear view of the main body, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. 38A is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. .

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and "4R probability variable jackpot" means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the projecting operation unit 400 and the composite operation unit 500 described below are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 can be visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit housing member 300. FIG. 5 shows a state in which each of the operation units 400 to 800 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. The state of being arranged at the outgoing position is shown in each figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 includes a rectangular bottom wall plate as viewed from the front and an outer wall plate erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion. A unit storage member 300 formed in a box shape whose side is open. The bottom plate of the unit housing member 300 is formed with a rectangular opening 301 in a front view at a center portion thereof, whereby the unit housing member 300 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the unit storage member 300, the protruding operation unit 400, the composite operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the retreat operation unit 700, and the overhang operation unit 800 are stored in the internal space, respectively. Is configured as

  The protruding operation unit 400 includes a base-side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and moves (displaces) the two displacement members 440 and 450 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let it. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stacked in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 to increase the size of the entire body, thereby ensuring visibility and enhancing the effect of rendering. The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The composite operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and moves the two members 550 and 560 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. To operate (displace). In this case, the composite operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only the rotational movement about the predetermined position as the center of rotation, while causing the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 to perform the linear movement. By performing the motion in combination with the rotation motion, a change is given to the trajectory of the driven member 560, and the effect is enhanced. The operation of the composite operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The rotation operation unit 600 includes a first rotator 650 and a second rotator 660 that are arranged concentrically, and by rotating both of the rotators 650 and 660, it is easy to associate both rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotation operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the retractable operation unit 700 includes a retractable member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the extending operation unit 800 includes a rotatable extended member 810, respectively, and the retractable member 710 and the extended member 810 are provided. Slide between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and a projecting position (not shown) which projects to the front (front) of the opening 301 (third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). (Displacement).

  Next, the projecting operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400 in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

  FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 700 that shares the projecting operation unit 400 and the case body 410 is provided along with the projecting operation unit 400. Further, a pair of projecting operation units 400 is disposed below the opening 301 on the left and right sides of the projecting operation unit 700 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since the structures are substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side in the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side in the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the projecting operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 forming a skeleton on the back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and a drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (a pinion gear 431, an intermediate gear 432, and a crank gear 433) for transmitting a rotational driving force, a base displacement member 440 rotatably supported by the case body 410, and a slide displacement by the base displacement member 440; It is mainly configured to include a relative displacement member 450 that is provided so as to be able to be disposed, and a connecting rod 460 that connects the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and that is rotatably supported by the case body 410. You.

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a housing recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (each of the gears 431, 432, and 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 protrudes from the side of the storage recess 411 (right side in FIG. 8A), and a base support shaft 413 protrudes below the storage recess 411 (lower side in FIG. 8A). Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material, and is disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation shaft of each of the gears 431 to 433.

  In the present embodiment, when the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as described later, each of the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, and each of the gears 431, 432, and 433 are connected to each other. Are stacked in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is formed in the front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively. Accordingly, the size of the protruding operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced accordingly.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to a drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is meshed with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is meshed with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is driven to rotate and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are supported by the case 410. Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 has a radial decoration formed on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than that of the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large so that teeth can be shielded from the player in front view.

  A crank pin 433a protrudes from the front (axial end face) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a columnar body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effecting members for performing an effect by being displaced from the retracted position to the extended position (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and include the base-side displacement member 440 (the shaft support). The hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base displacement member 440.

  Here, the decorative portion 454 is formed on the front side of the relative displacement member 450. The decorative portion 454 is a portion for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is arranged from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8). The whole is formed in a tapered shape as viewed from the front, which becomes narrower toward the distal end side (the rotational distal end side when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. , A first portion 454a, a second portion 454b, and a third portion 454c are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed in a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. That is, the second portion 454b located at the middle of the first portion 454a located at the distal end is connected to the third portion 454c located at the base end of the second portion 454b located at the middle. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged so that their positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5) are different from each other. Specifically, the second portion 454b located at the middle of the first portion 454a located at the distal end is connected to the third portion 454c located at the base end of the second portion 454b located at the middle. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Thereby, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) moves from the base end side (the rotation center side of the base displacement member 440, the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8) to the distal end side (the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8). 7 and 8 (in the upper end of FIGS. 7 and 8), it is inclined downward in a stepwise manner (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction approaching the case body 410.

  Thus, as described later, when rotating the proximal displacement member 440 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decorative member 480 is prevented from contacting with the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). When the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the decorative portion 454 is moved forward (front). ) To improve the power.

  The detailed configuration of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connection rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and has a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as a long hole extending along the longitudinal direction at the other end in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and a longitudinal direction between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462. And a rod groove 463 recessed on the back side as a concave groove extending along.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. The connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Accordingly, as described later, the rotation of the crank gear 433 causes the connection rod 460 to rotate about the rod support shaft 412 as a rotation center (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and the rotation of the connection rod 460 causes The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slidably displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and are operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base-side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front (one side) side of the case body 410. As compared with the case where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are provided on the front (one side) side and the drive motor 420 is provided on the back side (other side) side with the case body 410 interposed therebetween, the projecting operation is performed. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Further, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive motor 420 is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 13A). The 420 and the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as a retreat position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is formed by a plurality of gears (each of the gears 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. A portion composed of a connecting rod 460 forming a mechanism, and a portion where the connecting rod 460 (the connecting hole 462 and the rod groove 463) is connected to the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 and the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 as described later. Of the transmission means (each of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and each of the support shafts 411 and 412 so that the Set the placement.

  Accordingly, in a state where the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission unit is disposed in an area overlapping the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in a front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the rear side of the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively used as a space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effect of the above-described positional relationship between the drive motor 420 and the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450, it is possible to synergistically achieve a reduction in the outer shape of the protruding operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and front view. it can.

  Next, the operation of the transmission means (the pinion gear 431, the intermediate gear 432, the crank gear 433, and the connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing transmission means in a front view. FIG. 9A shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 9A. 10 illustrates a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotation position, and FIG. 10 illustrates a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position.

  9 and 10, the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 are schematically illustrated to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rods 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position, the intermediate rotational position, and the second rotational position are two positions P1, Pm, and P2. This is schematically illustrated using a chain line.

  In the description of FIGS. 9 and 10, FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 are appropriately referred to. FIG. 9A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and FIG. 9B corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B. FIG. 10 corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is at the position P1, the base-side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position, and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. They are arranged at reference positions, respectively (see FIGS. 12A and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, in a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (ie, counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, tensions the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position) can be restricted by bringing the crankpin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when disposing the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the extended position to the retracted position, for example, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, the mechanical displacement can be reduced. The basic displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retreat position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism for restricting the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are displaced. Can be avoided beforehand.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 moves the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 to the lower end (rod end). The connecting rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A about the rod supporting shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is located at the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is located at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 pushes the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod end). After sliding toward the end opposite to the support shaft 412), it is slid toward the upper end (the end on the side of the rod support shaft 412), and the connecting rod 460 rotates around the rod support shaft 412 as shown in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). Thereby, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotation position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P2. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is located at the rotation position and the relative displacement member 450 is located at the overhang position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  When the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position, similarly to the case where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 460 is located at the upper end of the rod groove 463 (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side).

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is located at the second rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise in FIG. 10 (that is, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). Rotation in the direction of projecting to the position) can be restricted by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when disposing the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the retracted position to the extended position, for example, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, mechanically The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the projecting position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism for restricting the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and these two displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are moved. Collision with another member can be avoided beforehand.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the configuration and operation of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base-side displacement member 440 includes a main body 441 formed in a long plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body 411, and a main body 441. And a first slide hole 443 and a second slide hole 444 that are formed as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11).

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted. By this insertion, the base displacement member 440 can rotate on the case body 410 about the base support shaft 413 as a center of rotation. It is supported by. That is, as will be described later, the base-side displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12B, 12C, 14 and 15). And is rotatably supported between them.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed below the center of the main body 411 in the longitudinal direction and at a position closer to one side (overhang position) than the center of the main body 411 in the width direction. Accordingly, the rotation angle required for the base-side displacement member 440 to reduce the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative-displacement member 450 from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (a predetermined area) can be reduced. The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be reduced, and as a result, the effect of the displacement of the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  The relative displacement member 450 has a main body 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the main body 451 (vertical direction in FIG. 11). It is mainly provided with a pair of slide pins 453 arranged with a space therebetween, and a decorative portion 454 arranged on the front of the main body 451.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base-side displacement member 440, respectively. Are disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 along its longitudinal direction. That is, as described later, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b), 13 and 14) and an extended position (see FIGS. 12 (c) and 15). Is disposed on the base-side displacement member 440 so as to be slidable between them.

  In this case, the distal end of the connection pin 452 protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base-side displacement member 440 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and the relative displacement member 450 is thereby inserted. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as described later, the rotation of the crank gear 433 causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate about the rod support shaft 412 as a rotation center (see FIG. 9), so that the base relative to the base support shaft 413 as the rotation center. The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be performed, and the sliding displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be performed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are arranged at different positions (at intervals) along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the portion where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front-rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 (the direction in which the relative displacement member 450 approaches and separates from the case body 410). ) Can be suppressed and the slide displacement can be stabilized.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is disposed closer to the longitudinal end of the relative displacement member 450 than the slide pin 453 (upper side in FIG. 11). Accordingly, the position where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be made closer to the longitudinal end of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the position where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base-side displacement member 440 toward the front end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 from swaying in the front-rear direction (direction approaching and separating from the case body 410).

  That is, only the base side (the shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the base side displacement member 440 is provided with the relative displacement member 450. Because of the structure, the distal ends in the longitudinal direction of the two displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the distal ends are likely to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking may cause the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position to be supported on the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is set to the longitudinal end side is effective.

  The collar C is rotatably fitted to the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. Since the collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pins 452 and the slide pins 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, each of the collars C extends along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can slide smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, a large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base-side displacement member 440 and the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460. The facing distance between the base-side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is secured to the connecting rod 460 by a disk-shaped disc S fastened to the end face on the distal end side by screws, and the slide pin 453 is fixed to the end face on the distal end side. The slide guide 470 in the form of a long flat plate is fastened and fixed by screws, and is prevented from coming off from the base side displacement member 440.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. FIG. 12A corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is located at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1). FIG. 12B corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 9B and 14 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is located at the intermediate rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position Pm, respectively). . FIG. 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is located at the second rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9A and 13), the rotation of the base displacement member 440 about the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation is performed. The reference position is a position where the relative displacement member 450 slides with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 at a retreat position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412, and a position where the amount of protrusion from the base-side displacement member 440 is minimized. Position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460.

  When the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9A) rotates from the state shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (FIG. 12A) about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (the end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 440 are rotated. The displacement member 450 is rotated clockwise (first operation) in FIG. 12A with the relative displacement member 450 together with the relative displacement member 450 with the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm as shown in FIG. 12B (see FIGS. 9B and 14), the rotational position of the proximal displacement member 440 is changed to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at the rotation position which is the position furthest away from the camera.

  In this case, the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 about the rod supporting shaft 412 as a rotation center in FIG. 12A counterclockwise rotates the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 with the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 at the lower end. When sliding in the direction of, since the sliding direction is substantially along the direction of the sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is moved relative to the base-side displacement member 440. No force component is generated in the direction of sliding displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the proximal displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of the slide displacement from the reference position), the displacement of the proximal displacement member 440 about the proximal support shaft 413 as the center of rotation. Only rotation can be generated.

  Accordingly, both displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base support shaft 413 in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotation tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) or the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, the size of the projecting operation unit 400 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in design when defining the shape of the decorative member 480 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12B, the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9B) causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 12B around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 slides toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). (The side end), and the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the relative displacement member 450 extends in the longitudinal direction (the first and second slide holes 443 and 444) with respect to the base side displacement member 440. (Second operation). Thus, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 12C (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is changed to the base position. It is arranged at a position where the amount of protrusion from the side displacement member 440 is the maximum, which is the position where the amount of protrusion is maximum.

  In this case, the rotation position of the base-side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotation position that is the position farthest from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 counterclockwise in FIG. 12B counterclockwise about the rod support shaft 412 rotates the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. Since the sliding direction is substantially perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid with respect to the base-side displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and no force component in the direction of rotating the base displacement member 440 around the base support shaft 413 is used. Therefore, only the sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be generated while restricting the rotation of the proximal displacement member 440 about the rotation axis of the proximal support shaft 413.

  Accordingly, in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (a state where the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position), the proximal side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position. After the first operation is completed, the rotation of the base-side displacement member 440 is restricted (the base-side displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position), and the relative displacement member is rotated. The slide displacement (second operation) that extends the 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be performed. That is, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and performed in two stages as separate operations, the operation in a different mode can be performed as compared with the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously. It is possible for the user to clearly recognize, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect by displacing each of the displacement members 440 and 450.

  The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 to 15 are front views of the projecting operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13A and 13B correspond to the states illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 12A, and FIGS. 14A and 14B correspond to the states illustrated in FIGS. 9 (b) and 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). 13 (b), 14 (b) and 15 (b) show a state in which the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 have been removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the projecting operation unit 400, as described above, the base-side displacement member 440 moves the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A to the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13) is formed so as to be rotatable between the rotational positions shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and the relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base side displacement member 440 is positioned between the reference position shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A. A first operation for sliding the base-side displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position between the projecting position shown in FIG. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the extended position can be executed.

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base-side displacement member 440 at the retracted position is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is moved to the second position. By performing the sliding displacement (extending) to the extended position by the operation, the relative displacement member 450 can be extended outward from the base-side displacement member 440 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be made larger as a whole, so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, by disposing the base-side displacement member 440 to the rotation position by the first operation, the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (the decoration portion in this embodiment). The entire first portion 454a of the 454 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86. As shown in FIG. , The substantially entire relative displacement member 450 (in the present embodiment, the entire third portion 454 a of the hitting decorative portion 454) can be visually recognized by the player via the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 retracted to the retracted position and made invisible from the opening of the center frame 86 is first made to appear from the side into the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational movement (first operation). The player can visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and then, by linear motion (second operation), projects toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86, and the An effect of making the player visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visual area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by a motion mode (linear motion) different from the motion mode at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the unexpected area due to the change in the motion mode and the visual area by the linear motion can be increased. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the composite operation due to the combination of these being performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved in a mode in which the relative displacement member 450 protrudes and retracts from the opening of the center frame 86 by simply linear movement (a mode in which the relative displacement member 450 reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position).

  On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member in the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A by the first operation, as shown in FIG. 14A and FIG. By sliding (shortening) the relative displacement member 450 to the reference position by the second operation, the protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 outward from the base-side displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement members 440 and 450 can be reduced in size as a whole, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement members 440 and 450 at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other components and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the proximal displacement member 440, and the second operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slid with respect to the base displacement member 450 between the reference position and the extended position, for example, the second operation is to move the relative displacement member 440 relative to the base displacement member 450. As compared with the case of rotating, the space required for displacing the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the overhang position can be suppressed, and other components and devices are accordingly disposed. Space can be secured. Also, since the mode of displacement (slide displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the mode of displacement (rotation) of the proximal-side displacement member 450 by the first operation, The effect of performing by performing the first operation and the second operation continuously can be enhanced.

  In particular, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is set to a direction along the longitudinal direction of the two displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed in the posture along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base-side displacement member 440, and is slid in the direction along the longitudinal direction. 450 can be efficiently extended and shortened as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in a state where the base-side displacement member 440 is located at the rotation position, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced (extended) so as to increase the overall displacement so that the two displacement members 440 are increased. , 450 can be sufficiently recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in a state where the base-side displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position, the relative displacement member 450 is made smaller as a whole by sliding displacement (shortening), so that the two displacement members 440 are reduced. , 450, and a space for disposing other components and devices can be secured.

  Further, according to the protruding operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 corresponds to FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (b). As shown in FIG. 15B and FIG. 15B, the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 which comprises a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460 and forms a crank mechanism together with the crank gear 433. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 411 that is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base support shaft 412 that is the rotation center of the base displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations, that is, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the cost of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as the transmission means, a gear may be provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460, and the teeth of the crank gear 433 may be meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460. In this case, the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are provided side by side in the plane, and no overlapping margin is formed in a front view, so that the space required for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, it is shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be arranged in a state where there is always an overlap margin in a front view, and the space required for disposing the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Next, a relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400. 17A is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 in a portion XVIIb of FIG. 17A. It is. FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a decorative member 480 is disposed above the protruding operation unit 400 (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, another member located on the back side of the decoration member 480 can be visually recognized by the player via the decoration member 480 (transmitted).

  In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed such that a part thereof projects downward (downward in FIG. 17B), so that the base-side displacement member as viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 17B. 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are formed with an overlap margin of the dimension L. Accordingly, when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectory of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is changed. It can be made to overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 in a front view.

  That is, since the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced in a state of passing through the back side of the decoration member 480, the operation of intersecting the decoration member 480 and both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the intersection, the decoration members 480 can be transmitted and the two displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect of rendering both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. In particular, in the present embodiment, the distal end side of the substrate displacement member 440 separated from the decorative member 480 is made to protrude beyond the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 close to the decorative member 480, so that it is difficult to make contact with the decorative member 480. As a result, the dimension L, which is the overlap margin, can be made larger. Therefore, the effect of the intersection can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 that forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned on the proximal end side (the rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, FIG. b) From the lower side to the distal side (the rotation distal side of the proximal displacement member 440, the upper side in FIG. 17B), it is inclined stepwise in a direction approaching the case body 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B). You. In addition, the distal end side of the base-side displacement member 440 disposed on the back side (the left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is made to protrude beyond the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, the whole of the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be shaped to be disposed closer to the case body 410 (rear side, left side in FIG. 17B) as the distal end side.

  Thus, when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectory overlaps the decoration member 480 in a front view. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 480 from coming into contact with the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 while ensuring the effect of the effect.

  In this case, the base-side displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is supported by the base-side support shaft 413, and the distal end side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). During the first operation, the front end side is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating to the case body 410 side, the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 5), and the possibility of contact with the decorative member 480 is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment (the shape that is inclined such that the tip end side is closer to the case body 410 side) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the entire decorative portion 454 approached to the case body 410 side, but, as described above, the distal end side (the rotation distal end side of the proximal end displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). A shape closer to the front (front) (right side in FIG. 17B) is closer to the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than upper side. That is, the decorative portion 454 is stepped up and inclined in a direction away from the case body 410 (the right side in FIG. 17B) from the distal end toward the proximal end.

  Thereby, when the relative displacement member 450 is slid (the second operation) from the reference position to the overhang position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved to the front (front) side (ie, to the front). (Closer to the player) to increase the power. In particular, in the present embodiment, the outer shape is made larger as the portion (the second portion 454b is larger than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c is larger than the second portion 454b) arranged on the front (front) side. Can be more effectively exerted.

  Next, the composite operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 illustrates a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5). You.

  Here, a pair of the composite operation units 500 is disposed on the left and right sides of the rotary operation unit 600 above the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since they are formed and have substantially the same structure, only one (the one disposed on the right side in the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side in the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the composite operation unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the driving motor 530 and causes the driven member 560 to follow the displacement of the driven member 550. Then, the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, as described later, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing its relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and sliding displacement (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Accordingly, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed along a fixed trajectory about the predetermined position (the shaft portions 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 is driven by a different trajectory from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and the mode of displacement of the driven member 560 can be changed. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to change the mode of displacement of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the composite operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the composite operation unit 500. FIG. FIG. 22A is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22B is a view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to a state where the composite operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 18 is disassembled, and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state where the composite operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 19 is disassembled. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the state shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a rear case body 520 that form a skeleton thereof, a drive motor 530 disposed on the rear side of the rear case body 520, A crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, a driven member 550 to which the driving force of the drive motor 530 is transmitted via the crank member 540, and a relative displacement of the driven member 550 And a driven member 560 that is connected as possible.

  The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are provided in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, respectively. It is accommodated in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed to have a size that allows the crank pin 541 to reciprocate. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by extracting a part of an annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27 (a) to FIG. 29 (a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As described later, the first pin 561a slides along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guidance), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (particularly, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27A to 29A). .

  The rear case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is provided concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. That is, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 have their shaft support holes 511, 521 supporting the shaft portions 553, 554 of the driven member 550, respectively, so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. Can support. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted. The drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by extracting a part of an annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to FIG. 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. As described later, the connection shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523. By performing (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (particularly, the relative sliding position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27B to 29B).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) at the time of being driven to rotate by the drive motor 530. A crank pin 541 is provided at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 with the rotation, and the shaft portions 553 and 554 are pivotally supported. By being pivotally supported by the holes 511 and 521, it is rotatably held by the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. Here, a detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 23A is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23B is a rear view of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-shaped front plate portion 551, and a long plate-shaped interposition that intersects the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle in front view. A plate portion 552, a cylindrical shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552, and a circle protruding from the back surface of the interposed plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553. It mainly comprises a columnar shaft 554.

  The front plate portion 551 is a member disposed on the front surface of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an oblong front view at one end (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected). A drive groove 551a is formed. The drive groove 551a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can slide along the drive groove 551a, whereby the shaft 553, 554 is covered with the rotation center. The driving member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

  The interposed plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has one end side (front gastric body portion 551). A connection groove 552a having an oval shape as viewed from the front is formed in the side opposite to the side to which is connected. The connection groove 552a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b rotatably and slidably. That is, a driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has an area overlapping the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 554, and It is configured such that the connection shaft 561b can be arranged in that area (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as described later, the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553 and 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed of a resin material as a separate member from these portions 552 to 554. The axial end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface on the opposite side to the interposed plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the rear surface on the base end side (the side opposite to the side where the drive groove 551a is formed) of the front plate portion 551, It is assembled by fastening and fixing both with screws.

  In this case, four pins 553a protrude from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four positions on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. It is perforated and assembled with each pin 553a received in each hole 551b. Accordingly, the number of screws can be reduced, and the cost of parts can be reduced, and the relative rotation of the flat plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552 can be reliably prevented.

  Returning to FIGS. 20 to 23, the description will be continued. As described above, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. 560 is connected so that relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement) is possible. As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven by the displacement of the driving member 550, and connects the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 to the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550. In addition, by being inserted into the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are held rotatably and slidably displaceable. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped interposed plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions having a decorative shape formed on the front thereof, It mainly comprises a back plate 563 connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 and connected to the back of the interposed plate 561.

  The interposed plate portion 561 is a member (see FIGS. 20 and 21) disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and has a front case body 510 at the front. A first pin 561a inserted into the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) protrudes, and a connection shaft 561b protrudes from the rear surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Is done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, so that the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the rear case body 520 about the connection shaft 561b as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the interposed plate portion 561 (that is, the driven member 560) slides in a direction along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a driven member. It is slid relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided in the interposed plate portion 561 is inserted into the third case 520 of the rear case body 520. The same operation as in the above-described case can be obtained by inserting the second guide groove 523.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is connected to both the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552). The driven member 560 is inserted into the connection shaft 561b and guided by the second guide groove 523 to define the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the rear case body 520 (that is, the driven member 560 is slid with respect to the driven member 550). ) And a role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and slide displacement) by being inserted into the connection groove 561b. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  The back plate portion 563 is a circular member as viewed from the front, which is provided on the back surface of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has a contact portion on its front surface (the front side surface in FIG. 25A). 563a is protruded. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the rear surface of the rear case body 520, and is formed in a front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion of the rear plate portion 563 (the protruding distal end surface of the contact portion 562a) contacts the rear surface of the rear case body 520.

  As described above, by providing the contact portion 563 concentric with the connection shaft 561b on the rear plate portion 563, when the connection shaft 561b is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a is provided. Even when the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the back case body 520 about the connection shaft 561b as a rotation center by the rotation action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body is also provided. It is possible to keep the contact state of the 520 against the back surface constant, and suppress a change in the support reaction force. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposed plate portion 561 is formed separately from the respective portions 562 and 563 from a resin material. The connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 is brought into contact with the front face of the connecting plate 561 in the axial direction, and the two are assembled and fastened with screws. The structure in which the plurality of pins 561c projecting from the axial end surface of the connection shaft 561b are respectively received in the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563 so that the two can be relatively non-rotatably connected is the above-described driven structure. The description is omitted because it is the same as the case of the member 550.

  Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the description will be continued. The assembly of the composite operation unit 500 can be performed as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. In this assembling, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is previously inserted into the connection groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the rear case body 520, and the crank pin 541 is connected to the driven member 550 through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. (Front plate portion 551). At the same time, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the rear plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. I do. Accordingly, the driven member 560 can be rotatably assembled to the rear case body 520, can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner, and can be driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are fastened and fixed by screws (not shown). Accordingly, the driven member 550 is displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (followed) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the composite operation unit 500, since the components can be assembled by sequentially assembling the components to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, not only the assembly cost can be reduced, but also the unitization can be achieved. Thus, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the game machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the composite operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 27A, 28A, and 29A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIGS. FIGS. 28B and 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  Similarly, FIGS. 30A, 31A, and 32A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30B, 30B, and 30B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (the state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate the case where the driven member 560 is disposed in the extended position. (A state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 corresponds to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is located at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located on the right side in front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). Accordingly, the driven member 550 inclines the distal end side (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (the right side in FIG. 30B) when viewed from the front, and The end 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (upward in FIG. 30B). In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotation position where the rotation ends in the clockwise (clockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is configured such that the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 is lifted upward, so that the connection shaft 561b is positioned at the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed up to the upper side in FIG. 27 (b). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30 (b)) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 30 (b)). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 is configured such that the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is located at the upper end side (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (FIG. The horizontal posture is such that the portion where the first pin 561a is disposed) is directed leftward in front view (left side in FIG. 27A). In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotation position where the rotation ends in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIGS. 27 and 30 is located at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates the drive shaft 531 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in front view by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 moves to the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20). (See FIG. 21) in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction when viewed from the front, and as shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is at a position substantially intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position substantially halfway between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 makes the front plate portion 551 substantially upright, and The mounting plate 552 is set to be substantially horizontal. In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position substantially at the center of a rotatable range around the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, when the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, the driven member 560 causes the connection shaft 561b pushed down by the connection groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 to move to the second position. The posture is set at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the range of displacement in the up-down direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 31 (b)), and at the rightmost position in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 30 (b)). It is located at a certain position. In addition, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (of the first pin 561a). (Arranged portion) is inclined toward the upper left side in the front view (the upper left side in FIG. 28A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position approximately at the center in a rotatable range around the connection shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front with the drive shaft 531 being rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 from the state shown in FIGS. When the crank pin 541 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Rotated in the counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise), the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position as shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located on the left side in front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (see FIG. ) Left side), whereby the driven member 550 tilts the distal end side (the portion where the drive groove 551a is formed) of the front plate portion 551 to the left side in front view (FIG. 32 (b) left side) and interposes it. The distal end side of the plate portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lowered downward (downward in FIG. 32B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotation position where the rotation ends in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, since the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 has the tip end side of the interposed plate portion 552 lowered as described above, the connection shaft 561b is connected to the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( 29 (b) (lower side). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at the lowest position in the up-down direction (FIG. 32 (b) up-down direction) and at the leftmost position in the left-right direction (FIG. 32 (b) left-right direction). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 is configured such that the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is located at the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 is provided. The first pin 561a is disposed in an upright posture with the first pin 561a facing upward (upward in FIG. 29A) when viewed from the front. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotation position that is a rotation end point in the clockwise (clockwise) direction as viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is displaced by the displacement of the driven member 550. The driving member 550 can be driven while being relatively displaced. In other words, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shaft portions 533 and 554, and even when the driven member 550 is displaced along a fixed trajectory, the trajectory (displacement) differs from that of the driven member 550. The driven member 560 can be displaced. Further, such a change in the mode of the displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550. Therefore, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, the displacement is not affected. The driven member 560 can be displaced along a different trajectory (displacement mode) from the driven member 550. As a result, while the output of the drive motor 530 is kept constant, a change can be given to the mode of displacement of the driven member 560.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, means (displacement defining means) for relatively displacing the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 includes the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560, and the connection shaft 561b. That is, the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b are guided along the guide grooves 513 and 523, so that the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed according to the contour (shape) of each of the guide grooves 513 and 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by mechanical elements such as the guide groove and the shaft-like body guided by the guide groove, and the structure is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. Further, since a simple mechanical element can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable portion can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set. The degree of freedom of design when setting the mode can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily secure variations of the mode of the displacement that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, where the driven member 560 is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member 550, the first member 511 is mainly constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a and mainly regulates rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure which is constituted by the second guide groove 523 and the connection shaft 561b and mainly regulates the slide displacement are provided. This not only increases the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement, but also allows the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 to be of the first type even when there are a plurality of types (rotation and slide displacement). And the second guide structure can provide appropriate guidance. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

  Here, in the first guide structure described above, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the interposed plate portion 561 or the back plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the back case body 520, respectively. This is true even if the configuration is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing a displacement space for the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, so that they need not be formed to have relatively large outer shapes. And a dead space tends to be formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove 513 as the front case body 510, the dead space can be effectively used, and a sufficient space for forming the first guide groove 513 can be secured. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and extension length of the first guide groove 513, and accordingly, it is possible to increase the variation that can be given to the mode of displacement. Note that the second guide structure is the same as that of the first guide structure, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the rear case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the rear case body 520, so that the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed. Can be formed without considering each other's formation positions.

  That is, when forming both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 in the rear case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect. The degree of freedom in designing the contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the contour (shape) and the extension length are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the partner. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement can be increased accordingly.

  Next, the rotation operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rotary operation unit 600 has a spherical liquid crystal device 670 in which a ring-shaped first rotator 650 is disposed so as to surround the periphery thereof, and a back surface of the first rotator 650. A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in a front view is disposed concentrically on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotation speeds and in opposite directions.

  Here, with a conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it has been difficult for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product is a form in which each rotating body is independently rotated without being related to other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of the effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let it.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotators are rotated differently. Since the rotation is performed in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be easily associated with each other to be recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be exhibited. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. 35 and 36, illustration of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted. The cross section illustrated in FIG. 36 corresponds to a cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a rear case body 620 that form a skeleton thereof, a drive motor 630 disposed on the back side of the rear case body 620, A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 is transmitted via the plurality of gears. The first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 that are rotated after being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610 And a light-emitting device 680 disposed on the front.

  The front case body 610 and the rear case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, respectively.

  The front case body 610 and the rear case body 620 are formed with openings 611 and 621, respectively, which are circular when viewed from the front, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided so as to protrude toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 is set to the same size, and the main body 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Supported as possible. A second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (the main body 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner circumferential surface and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotatable. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with reference to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, the gears (first and second outer gears 653a and 661a) engraved on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotator 650 (storage flange 653) and the second rotator 660, and the front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 provided in the case body 610 can be defined based on the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and the driving resistance can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft and is mounted on the back of the rear case body 620, so that the pinion gear 631 is connected to the first storage gear 641 of the plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Mesh. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431, and as a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 Can be rotated respectively.

  The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a group of gears for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, as described above. The teeth are each formed as spur gears engraved on the outer peripheral surface parallel to the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610 and are connected in series (engagement) with each other, so that the first storage gear 641 is at the top and the fifth storage gear 641 is the fifth storage gear. One gear train (gear train) whose rear end is the gear 645 is formed.

  The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be rotatable synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are respectively fixed to one end and the other end of the rotation shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and these gears 645, 646 and the rotation shaft are integrally formed. Rotated.

  According to the gear group configured as described above, when the drive motor 630 is driven to rotate, the rotation driving force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first housing gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of a gear train (gear train), and the fifth gear 645 is rotated, whereby the front gear 646 is rotated.

  Here, as described later, the second outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotary body 650 (the housing flange portion 653) is mounted on the second housing gear 642, and the second outer circumferential gear 652 of the second rotary body 660 is mounted on the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are meshed with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated with the rotation of the drive motor 630. In other words, the two rotators (the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660) can be simultaneously rotated by the rotational drive of the one drive motor 630.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643, 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speed between the front gear 646 and the second housing gear 642 rotated in synchronization with the fifth housing gear 645 be made different, but also the rotation between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be different. The directions can be different. As a result, as described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction between the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 can be different from each other.

  In the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is provided on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is provided on the front side of the front case cheer 610, respectively. On the rear side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are respectively meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are disposed on the front side of the front case body 610, and these two gears 642, 646 mesh with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. As compared with the structure for performing the rotation, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. Can be simplified.

  Further, the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second storage gear 642 of the gear train meshes are arranged on the rear side of the front case body 610, so that the rotation is achieved. The gear train and the storage flange 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from a player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the housing flange 653 invisibly can be simply formed by using the rear case body 610 without the need to provide a separate member.

  The first rotating body 650 is an effect member for effecting by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrally formed on the main body 651 and one axial side of the main body 651. It mainly includes a front effect portion 652 to be formed, and a storage flange portion 653 fastened and fixed by screws to the other axial side (axial end surface) of the main body portion 651.

  The main body portion 651 is a cylindrical portion formed of a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) around the main body 651 as a rotation axis. Here, the detailed configuration of the main body 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651 showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 37 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the diameters of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b are schematically illustrated in an enlarged scale compared to the actual case, and the first protrusion 651a is also illustrated. An imaginary circle IS, which is an imaginary circle in which the tops of the second protruding portions 651b are inscribed, is shown using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), a first protruding portion 651a and a second protruding portion 651b are formed on the main body portion 651, and a position corresponding to the second protruding portion 651b is , An offset portion 651c is formed.

  The first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are formed so as to protrude from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651, respectively, and extend along the axial direction of the main body 651 (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 37A). While extending over the entire length of the main body 651 (see FIG. 35), and at a plurality of locations (eight in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the first projection 651a and the second projection The portions 651b are formed by being alternately scattered in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a columnar body having a circular cross section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the axial direction matches the main body 651, and It is formed by a portion (a part of the cylindrical body) of the buried cylindrical body that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651. The second protrusion 651b is the same as the first protrusion 651a, except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

  As described above, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b that protrude from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651 are extended along the entire length of the main body 651 in the axial direction. 651 can be increased in rigidity.

  The second protruding portion 651b extends further in the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface in FIG. 37B). Therefore, as described later, when the storage flange 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body 651 with screws, the axially extending portion of the second protrusion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange 653. The main body 651 and the housing flange 653 can be firmly connected to each other so that they cannot rotate relative to each other (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the portion where the second projecting portion 651b is formed in the main body portion 651 is offset toward the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second projecting portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body 651 when viewed in the axial direction of the main body 651 shown in FIG. Since the offset portion 651c is formed in the main body 651 in this manner, the axis of the second protrusion 651b can be offset and positioned toward the axis as described later, and the entire main body 651 can be positioned. The rigidity can be increased.

  The plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the first protrusions 651a have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality (four in the present embodiment) of the second protrusions 652b are The amount of protrusion of the main body 651 from the outer peripheral surface is set to be the same as each other, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is also made equal by the offset by the offset portion 651c. A plurality (eight in the present embodiment) of the first protrusions 651a and the second protrusions 652b have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 37B, the virtual circle IS in which the tops of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 652b are inscribed can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter of the virtual circle IS is set to a size equivalent to or slightly larger than the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, when the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact areas thereof are changed to the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion. Since the contact resistance can be limited to each top portion of the main body 651, the main body 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612.

  In particular, the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are arc-shaped when viewed in the axial direction (specifically, arc-shaped in which a cross-section taken along a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body 651 is convex outward). ), So that not only the contact area can be suppressed, but also the tops of the first and second protrusions 651a and 651b smoothly contact the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, even when there is backlash due to dimensional tolerance, the main body 651 can be more smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 651b not only protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 but also protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651. Thus, when the main body 651 is molded using a resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and its moldability can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the main body 651 shown in FIG. 37B, the first protruding portion 651a is configured such that the first protruding portion 651a protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 and the main body 651 Of the portion formed to protrude from the inner peripheral surface are the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of a portion formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c is the same as the projecting dimension of a portion formed to project from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body portion 651 is made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the formability thereof can be further secured.

  Further, a hole having a circular cross section is formed in the second protruding portion 651b along the axial direction over the entire length (see FIG. 36). Thus, the thickness of the second protruding portion 651b having a larger diameter than that of the first protruding portion 651a can be made uniform with other portions (the main body 651, the offset portion 651c, the first protruding portion 651a, and the like). As a result, the moldability of the main body 651 can be ensured.

  In this case, a female screw is cut into the inner peripheral surface of the hole formed in the second protrusion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, since the second protrusion 651b having a relatively large diameter serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be secured. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and since the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is enhanced, the connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 is formed by the second protruding portion 651b. By carrying, both can be firmly connected and durability can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. The front presentation portion 652 is a portion visually recognized as a presentation portion by a player, and is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 in a flange shape. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652 is plated to give the front effect portion 652 an appearance simulating a glossy metal. The front effect portion 652 is made of a light transmissive resin material, but is plated so that the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) is visible to the player through the front effect portion 652. Can be avoided.

  The shape of the front presentation portion 652 in a front view is a saw blade shape in which irregular shaped peaks (second portions) and valleys (first portions) are repeated along the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, 16 pieces are formed. The peaks (valleys) are arranged at irregular intervals (unequal pitch) in the circumferential direction. As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front effect unit 652 sequentially pass through the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680, so that the player emits light. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical portion of the front case body 610. It is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the main body 651 inserted through the opening 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, as described above, the screw inserted into the storage flange 653 is screwed into the second protrusion 651b of the main body 651, whereby the storage flange 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body 651.

  The storage flange portion 653 has a thickness dimension set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the facing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension of the front case body 610 and the rear case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back of the storage flange 653 into contact with the back of the front case body 610 or the front of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first outer peripheral gear 653a has a second storage part of the above-described gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. The gear 642 meshes. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the housing flange 653 via the second housing gear 642 and the first outer gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 is rotated. Rotated.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and is provided in the opening 511 of the front case body 610 along the peripheral edge of the gear train. Since the second storage gear 642 meshes with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 can be simplified. In particular, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the projection surface 671 of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side, it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral side. Becomes Therefore, it is effective that the above-described transmission structure can be provided on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  In addition, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (the main body 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 is provided. The position can be defined based on the front case body 610. Therefore, the position between the gear (first outer gear 653 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange 653) and the second housing gear 642 arranged on the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined based on the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing condition between the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second housing gear 642 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotator 660 is an effect member for performing an effect by rotating on the back side of the first rotator 650 (see FIG. 33), and has a cylindrical main body formed of a light-transmitting resin material. 661 and a front effect portion 662 integrally formed on the axial end surface of the main body portion 661.

  The inner diameter of the main body 661 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610, and is fitted to the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612). By inserting the cylindrical portion 612 through the inner peripheral side of the main body portion 661), it is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer gear 661a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the second outer gear 661a meshes with the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front of the front case body 610. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 described above are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation is performed. The body 660 is rotated.

  As described above, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed in front of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Thus, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving motor 630 to the second rotating body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a tubular shape and is rotatably held by being externally fitted to the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. It will be difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective that the above-described transmission structure can be provided on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the disposition position of the second rotating body 660 is changed to the front case body. 610 can be defined as a reference. Accordingly, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed on the front case body 610 will be described. Can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state between the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed.

  The main body 661 has its axial dimension set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front of the front case body 610 and the back of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 makes one end face in the axial direction or the other end face in the axial direction of the main body part 661 abut on the back surface of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front face of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  The main body 661 is provided with a front protruding ridge 661b and a rear protruding ridge 661c protruding from one end surface in the axial direction and the other end surface in the axial direction. The front convex ridge 661b is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and the rear convex ridge 661c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape in a front view at a plurality of locations. Accordingly, when rotating the first rotating body 660, the frictional resistance between the main body 661 and the front case 610 and the second rotating body 650 (the front rendering section 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The front rendering unit 662 is located on the back side of the front rendering unit 652 in the first rotating body 650, is a part that is visually recognized by the player together with the rendering unit 652, and extends radially from the outer peripheral surface of the main body unit 661. It is formed to protrude outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregular shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along a circumferential direction, and an annular shape in a front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral portion 662a. And an inner peripheral side portion 662b.

  The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 is plated in the same manner as the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the above-described first rotating body 650, plating is applied to the entire surface (entire range) of the front rendering unit 652, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front rendering unit 662 is plated. And the inner peripheral side portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as described later, the peak (second portion) and the valley (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680. In order to allow the player to view the light-emitting element 681 intermittently and selectively, the light-emitting element 681 is watermarked through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 (that is, the portion that is not plated). Thus, it is possible for the player to visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light-transmitting material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device that projects an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface 671 is housed. And allows the player to visually recognize an image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection target surface portion 671. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the rear case body 620, and the projection surface portion 671 projects substantially half of the spherical shell forward from the front of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 in the upright posture (see FIG. 33).

  The light-emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in a front view, which is externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board housed in the case body 681, and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. And a plurality of (12 in this embodiment) light-emitting elements 682 arranged (mounted) on the side, and in a state of assembly, the front rendering portions 652 and 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. 662 is provided on the rear side.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having outer shapes larger than the light emitting elements 682 are formed at twelve places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the light-emitting device 680, when viewed from the front, the light-emitting element 682 is exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and the light emitted from the light-emitting element 682 is transmitted through the opening of the case body 681 to the front side (first rotation). Irradiation can be performed toward the front rendering units 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  On the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, as described above, the front rendering units 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are disposed, and the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotator 650 is provided. Is rotated, so that light emission by the light emitting element 682 can be intermittently and selectively made visible to the player. Here, a structure in which light emission of the light emitting element 682 is intermittently and selectively made visible to the player will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600. FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b) show a state in which the first rotary bodies 650 are arranged at different rotational positions. FIG. 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a rotary operation unit 600 along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38 (b). FIG.

  In FIG. 38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 of the rotating operation unit 600 and Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the radial position relationship between the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. 38 schematically shows a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the shape of the front rendering portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 in a front view is such that irregularly shaped peaks (second portions) and valleys (first portions) are repeated along the circumferential direction. The light emitting element 682 in the light emitting device 680 is located radially outside (the upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) the valley bottom in the light emitting device 680 and in the light emitting device 680. The radial position (the vertical position in FIG. 39 (a)) is set radially inward (FIG. 39 (a) lower side) from the peak.

  In this case, as described above, the front (front) plating is not applied to the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front directing portion 662 of the second rotating body 660, and light is transmitted therethrough. The formation range of the peripheral portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the bottom of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, when viewed from the front, light is emitted from a valley portion in the front rendering section 652 of the first rotating body 650 via the inner peripheral side portion 662b in the front rendering section 662 of the second rotating body 660 (that is, transmitted). The light emitting element 682 of the device 680 can be visually recognized by a player.

  Further, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance simulating a glossy metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662 a is disposed to face the rear side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in a front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  As described above, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the peaks and the valleys are formed alternately in the circumferential direction on the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 in a front view. As the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, so that the light emitting element 682 emits light. Through the inner peripheral portion 662b of the front effect portion 682, the player can intermittently visually recognize the player. Thus, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be effectively performed.

  Further, the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance simulating a glossy metal, and the front (front) side of the outer peripheral portion 662a is provided. , A front effect unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 is provided. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are rotated in directions opposite to each other, the first rotator 650 passes through the valley portion in the front rendering section 652 of the first rotator 650. The player can visually recognize a mode in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two rotators 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  That is, according to the rotating operation unit 600, the player who looks at the first rotating body 650 in front can intermittently visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front effect portion 652. On the summit side of the front and rear production unit 652 in the mountain and valley shape, the front production unit 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front production unit 652 (mountain and valley shape) of the first rotary body 650. Can be visually recognized. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 in association with each other, and as a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). Can be effectively performed.

  Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, the valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed at 16 locations in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are connected to the circumferential direction 12. Since the light-emitting elements 682 are arranged at the locations, the player can selectively visually recognize only the specific light-emitting elements 682 among the light-emitting elements 682 arranged at the twelve locations.

  That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect part 652 and the circumferential spacing of the light-emitting elements 682 are different from each other. For example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is made visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect portion 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. As shown in (), a different light emitting element 682 is selected, and the light emitting elements 682 disposed at four places on the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left are made visible.

  This allows not only the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 to be viewed intermittently, but also the position of the light emitting element 682 to be viewed to be changed in the circumferential direction, so that the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and The effect of rotating each of the second rotating bodies 660) can be performed more effectively.

  Returning from FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 is formed separately from the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 is fixed to the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. In addition, the second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

  That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body 651 into the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the rear surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the rear case body 620, respectively, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both the case bodies 610, 620 is formed. To the front side (front) and the back side (rear).

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by being fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotator 660 (the front ridge 661b and the rear ridge 662c) abuts on the back of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 and the front of the case 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. Thereby, the displacement of the second rotating body 660 with respect to both the case bodies 610 and 620 toward the front side (front) and the back side (rear) can be restricted.

  As described above, according to the rotating operation unit 600, the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself can be held while the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state. Also serves as a portion that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, so that the structure can be simplified accordingly. In addition, a holding structure that allows a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) to be held in a rotatable state is fixed by fastening the housing flange 653 to the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650. Since it can be formed only by performing the steps, the assembly process can be simplified. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the opening 621 is formed in the rear case body 620, a plurality of rotating bodies are formed in the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the rotation operation is performed simply by mounting the spherical liquid crystal device 670 from the back side of the back case body 620 and fastening and fixing the same. The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotating bodies 650 and 660 in another process. Therefore, this point can also contribute to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In the projecting operation unit 400 in the above-described embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base displacement member 440 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably provided with respect to 440. That is, the first operation is to rotate the proximal displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotational position (see FIG. 14), as in the case of the above-described embodiment. A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and an extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

  Also according to this configuration, the base-side displacement member 450 at the retreat position is arranged at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is arranged at the overhang position by the second operation. The player can sufficiently visually recognize the entire displacement members 440 and 450, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited, while the relative displacement member 450 at the extended position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation, and By disposing the base-side displacement member 440 at the rotation position to the retracted position by the first operation, the entire displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, and the space required for accommodating the displacement members is suppressed. it can.

  In the protruding operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the front end side of the base side displacement member 450 is higher than the front end side of the relative displacement member 450. The case where the projecting member is projected to the decorative member 480 side (the upper side in FIG. 17B) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Conversely, the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 is A configuration may be adopted in which the projection protrudes toward the decorative member 480 (the upper side in FIG. 17B) from the distal end side.

  Also according to this configuration, the rotation trajectories of the two displacement members 440 and 450 intersect with the decoration member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decoration member 480 can be transmitted and the two displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The effect produced by displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when projecting the relative displacement member 450 (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located on the front (front) can be further increased, and the force can be further increased. Improvement can be achieved.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 is formed in the shape of a long hole, so that the driven member 560 (connection shaft 561b) can rotate according to the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a). In addition, the case where the connection is performed in a state where the connection can be slid and displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driven member 550 (the connection groove 552a) can be formed by forming the connection groove 552a in a circular shape. A configuration in which the sliding displacement of the 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be adopted. According to this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. Can be changed to enhance the effect.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is meshed with a gear disposed concentrically with the driven member 560 with the connection shaft 561b and the gear. It may be constituted by a curved rack gear formed along an arc centered on the drive shaft 551a of the driven member 550 and disposed on the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by the gear rolling on the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, and the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are respectively inserted through the guide grooves 513 and 523. The case where the one pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed on the driven member 560. 560, and a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) to be inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided in the front case body 510 and / or the rear case body 520. May be. According to this configuration, the driven member 560 can be caused to perform a combined motion of the linear motion and the rotational motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed, The effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above-described embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is pierced (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide groove 513 is not limited to this. May be formed as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, for example. That is, the first guide groove 513 is only required to have a shape capable of guiding the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extend, while the connection groove 551a is extended linearly has been described. The first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are extended linearly while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Is also good. In particular, a case has been described in which the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are set to have a constant radius of curvature, but the present invention is not limited to this. Obviously, it is possible to adopt a different shape (for example, an S-shape). This makes it possible to change the trajectory of the driven member 560 more complicatedly, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set in an arc shape, the driven member 550 sets the arc shape to the rotation start end in the rotation direction about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Alternatively, it is preferable to make the radius larger than the reference value (reduce the curvature) in the state of being located at the end and in the vicinity thereof. That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second range of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the vicinity thereof is larger than the reference value, or the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is larger than the reference value. Preferably, the radius is larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. Thus, in the initial stage of starting driving the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is made invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is formed. Is first exposed from the area of the front case body 510 (made visible) to the entire driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (made visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the operation of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced without affecting the effect, and in the latter case, Since the movement of the driven member 560 can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded from the front case body 510, the effect that the driven member 560 suddenly appears from the front case body 510 or the driven member 560 is removed from the front case body 510. You can perform the effect of quickly hiding behind the back.

  Alternatively, when the driven member 560 is in a horizontal posture (when viewed in the direction of the connection shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)), the decoration is performed within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines that are vertically inclined at 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561b. (The position where the center of gravity of the portion 562 is located), the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal position, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where it is relatively necessary to support the own weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 by the driving force of the driving motor 530, the radius is increased, and the n-friction resistance and the driven An area where the influence of the inertial force due to the change in the posture of the member 560 can be reduced and the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced, but the weight of the driven member 560 (action of gravity) need not be supported by the drive force of the drive motor 530. By reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the effect.

  In the rotary operation unit 600 according to the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the main body 651 and the front rendering unit 652 are integrated with the first rotating body 650, and the storage flange 653 is provided separately. However, a configuration in which the first rotating body 650 is formed by integrating the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 and separately forming the front effect portion 652 may be adopted. According to this configuration, as in the case of the above embodiment, the structure for rotatably holding the plurality of rotating bodies and the assembly process can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case has been described where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) being a flat surface. Instead, a part or the whole of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. As other shapes, for example, a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a cross-sectional waveform, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface in which these are combined are exemplified. When these other shapes are employed, not only can light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral portion 662b be diffusely reflected or refracted, but also due to the rotation of the second rotating body 660, the diffused reflection and refraction can be prevented. Since the movement can be given in the direction of refraction, the effect can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 according to the above-described embodiment, the case has been described where the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in front view. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps with the entire front gear 646 in a front view. Thus, the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect unit 662, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. If the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a larger-diameter gear, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, a change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 with respect to the first rotating body 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 is omitted, but the following configuration may be adopted. In other words, the shape of the ridge in at least one or both of the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 or the second rotator 660 is formed in such a size that the front gear 646 can be shielded when viewed from the front. The rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at the phase position where the shape portion is disposed in front of the front gear 646. Thus, when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Operation Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. A relative position formed between the base-side displacement member and a reference position and a projecting position projecting outward from the base-side displacement member relative to the reference position and from the reference position. A displacement member, and a first operation of rotating the base-side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotation position; and moving the relative displacement member relative to the base-side displacement member in the reference position and the extended position. And a second operation of displacing the game machine between the game machines A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been known a gaming machine which performs an effect by rotating a displacement member around a rotatably supported base end side (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-92634). For example, paragraphs 0175 to 0189, see FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the tip side of the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in the opposite direction to the one direction. By rotating the displacement member in another direction, the displacement member is retracted outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device (retreat position). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it becomes difficult for the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the effect of the effect is sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, if the displacement member has a large outer shape, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retreat position). The gaming machine A1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and allows the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the evacuation position. It is intended to provide a gaming machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member includes a base displacement member rotatably formed between the retreat position and the rotation position, a reference position and the reference position provided at the base displacement member. A relative displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between a projecting position projecting outward from the proximal displacement member, and a first operation of rotating the proximal displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position; And the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member with respect to the base-side displacement member between the reference position and the overhang position can be performed, so that the base-side displacement member at the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When disposing the relative displacement member at the reference position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is disposed at the extension position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be extended outward from the proximal displacement member. Therefore, the displacement member can be enlarged as much as a whole, so that the player can sufficiently recognize the displacement member at the rotation position, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

  On the other hand, when disposing the base-side displacement member at the rotation position to the retracted position by the first operation, the relative-displacement member based on the extended position is disposed at the reference position by the second operation, so that the base member of the relative-displacement member is moved. An outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement member can be reduced in size as a whole, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement member at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other components and devices.

  Note that the second operation may be performed at least until the device is arranged at the evacuation position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least a part of the first operation and at least a part of the second operation may be executed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is disposed forward of a plane of movement of the displacement member and has an opening formed therein. When the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at a rotation position by a first operation, the relative displacement is reduced. At least a part of the member is made visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and when the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the relative displacement member has A gaming machine A2 in which an area visible to a player via an opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotating motion (first operation), and the relative displacement thereof is changed. Making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, and then perform an effect of expanding the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member by linear motion (second operation). Can be.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base-side displacement member, and the second operation is to move the relative displacement member to the reference position and overhang with respect to the base-side displacement member. A gaming machine A3 characterized by sliding displacement between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed so as to be slidable on the proximal displacement member, and the second operation is to move the relative displacement member relative to the proximal displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the extended position, for example, the relative displacement member is extended from the reference position as compared with a case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated with respect to the base side displacement member. The space required for displacing to the outgoing position can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other components or devices can be secured accordingly. Also, since the mode of displacement of the relative displacement member by the second operation can be made different from the mode of displacement of the base-side displacement member by the first operation, the effect of performing the first operation and the second operation. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed in the base side displacement member in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other, and the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of each other. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed on the base-side displacement member in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other, and the direction of the slide displacement is relative to each other. Since the direction is set along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by sliding displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base-side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotation position, the displacement member is enlarged as a whole by extension, so that the player can sufficiently recognize the displacement member, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, in the retracted position, the space required for housing the displacement member can be reduced by shortening the displacement member as a whole by shortening, and the space for disposing other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member retracted to the retreat position is first made to appear from the side in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member is provided. In addition to making the player visually recognize only the relative displacement member, the player makes the player directly view the second member by a linear motion (second operation), thereby extending an area in which the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member. be able to. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by a motion mode (linear motion) different from the motion mode at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the unexpected area due to the change of the motion mode and the visual area can be expanded by the linear motion. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to being performed, and a sense of unity of the composite operation due to the combination of these being performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved in a mode in which the relative displacement member protrudes and retracts from the opening of the front member only by a linear motion (a mode in which the relative displacement member reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position).

  In the gaming machine A4, there is provided a transmission unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A4, the game machine A4 further includes a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member. Since it is disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the disposing space for the transmission means.

  The gaming machine A5 includes a holding member that holds the driving unit, the transmitting unit, and the displacement member. The driving unit and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member, and the displacement member has a longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A6, wherein the gaming machine A6 is disposed at the retreat position in a posture in which the driving means is positioned on an extension of the line.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are provided on one surface side of the holding member. The size in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced as compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively provided. Further, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive means is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive means can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as the evacuation position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there is provided a transmitting unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and a holding member for holding the transmitting unit, and the transmitting member is configured to drive the driving unit. A rotating member rotated by receiving a force, a predetermined position between one side position and the other side position is eccentrically rotated from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. A link member that is rotatably supported and the other side position is connected to a relative displacement member of the displacement member, wherein the rotating member is rotated between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, The first operation is performed by rotating the base-side displacement member via the relative displacement member of the displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the rotation member is moved between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. When rotated between Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and rotates the one-side position to the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation of the rotation member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the rotation of the rotation member is transmitted to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. Can be transmitted. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base-side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member with the displacement of the link member, Can perform actions. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced with respect to the base side displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation Can be executed. That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by one driving unit, so that the component cost is reduced. The cost can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the transmission means may be provided with a gear at one side position of the link member, meshing the gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member with the gear, and displacing the link member. The space required for disposing the members and the link members increases. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotation member, so that the rotation member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in a front view, The space required for disposing the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed by using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the base displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position at least partially overlapping in a front view. A gaming machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decoration member are viewed from the front. Partially intersect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is configured such that one side in the longitudinal direction of the base-side displacement member is a rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement member is in a longitudinal direction relative to the front side of the base-side displacement member. Is disposed so as to be slidably displaced along the second movement, the second operation is to slidably displace the relative displacement member between the reference position and the extended position with respect to the base-side displacement member, When the base member is rotated by the first operation, at least a part of the displacement trajectory on the rotation distal end side of the displacement member when the base member is rotated overlaps in a front view, and the base member is rotated by the first operation. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotation position, the overlap with the displacement member in a front view is not formed, and the relative displacement member is such that the rotation center side is closer to the front side than the rotation tip side. Gaming machine A9, characterized in that are location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base-side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation tip side is formed so as to be recessed to the back side, when the base-side displacement member is rotated by the first operation, the contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member can be suppressed. In this case, the one side of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member is used as the rotation center in the first operation. Therefore, the rotation end side, which is a free end, easily swings back and forth during the first operation, and comes into contact with the decorative member. Is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slid from the reference position to the extended position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base-side displacement member is positioned such that the center of rotation is closer to the front than the tip of rotation. With the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be arranged more forward (side closer to the player) by that amount, and the force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side with respect to the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member may be any shape between the rotation tip side and the rotation center side, for example, It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed linearly or continuously and gradually.

  In any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, a pin member provided on one of the base-side displacement member or the relative displacement member and a pin member provided on the other of the base-side displacement member or the relative displacement member can be slidably displaced. A slide groove for receiving and allowing the relative displacement member to slide relative to the base side displacement member, wherein a position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is more relative to the pin member than the pin member. A gaming machine A10, which is located at a tip end side in a sliding direction of a displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position at which the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is closer to the distal end in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member than the pin member. Therefore, the position where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be closer to the distal end side of the relative displacement member in the sliding direction. In other words, the position where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be kept away from the position where the base-side displacement member is supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from swinging in the front-rear direction.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Composite Operation Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that displaceably holds the driven member. A driven member that is displaceably connected to the driven member; and a displacement defining unit that defines a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. A displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member is determined by the displacement defining unit. The gaming machine B1 wherein the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, by a driving force from a driving means, for example, an overhang position which becomes a front surface of a liquid crystal display device and an overhang position from the overhang position. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position and a retracted position retracted in a direction outside a display area of the device is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-200790 (for example, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to FIG. 15)). According to this gaming machine, by changing the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent, a change is given to the mode of displacement of the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the output of the driving unit is changed, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced in accordance with the change of the output of the driving unit. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement. The gaming machine B1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can change the mode of displacement of a displacement member while keeping the output of a driving unit constant. I do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving unit, the displacement defining unit defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, thereby displacing the driven member. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a fixed trajectory such as a straight line or an arc, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from the driven member. In addition, since the change in the mode of the displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced on the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member and the holding member, and the other of the driven member and the holding member guided along the first groove. And a first guided part formed in the game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove, The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be defined. Thus, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, whereby the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the first groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped portion (first groove portion) and the portion guided by the portion (first guided portion), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state, when the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member, The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong impression change as a change in the mode of displacement.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner, so that the driven member is relatively moved with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only can the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by sliding displacement. Variations of the change that can be provided can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes a second groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the second groove. And a second guided portion formed in the game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove, the mode of the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is connected to the driven member so as to be rotatable and slidably displaceable, the guide structure based on the combination of the first groove and the first guided portion and the combination of the second groove and the second guided portion are used. By providing both the guide structure and the guide structure, not only can the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement be increased, but even if the displaceable direction of the driven member with respect to the driven member becomes Since the guide can be provided by the guide structure, unstable displacement can be suppressed, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5 also, similarly to the case described above, the groove defining portion (the second groove portion) and the portion guided by the groove portion (the second guided portion) constitute the displacement defining means. Can be simplified, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in a driven member, and the driven member is configured such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slidable. A groove-shaped connection groove portion that is inserted in a possible state, and the second guided portion is inserted into the connection groove portion so that the driven member is rotatable and slidably displaceable in the driven member. A gaming machine B6 which is connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the second groove is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is formed in the driven member. Since the driven member is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member by being inserted into the connection groove, the driven member is held by being guided by the second groove to the second guided portion. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted into the connection groove can be combined. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, in the holding member, at least a portion where the second groove is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is connected to the second groove of the holding member. A game machine B7 comprising: a contact portion abutting on a peripheral edge of the second guided portion; and the contact portion is formed in a circular shape concentric with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes a contact portion that is in contact with the periphery of the second groove of the holding member, and the contact portion is the second guided portion. The contact area between the contact portion and the holding portion (peripheral edge of the second groove portion) even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove portion). , The change of the supporting reaction force can be suppressed. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, in the holding member, the driven member can be displaced by a driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The gaming machine B8 is formed so as to be able to hold the driving means, the driven member and the driven member in the following condition.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member allows the driven member to be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the holding member is capable of displacing the driven member. Accordingly, the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state where the driven member can be displaced. Therefore, one device in which the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are held by the holding member. As a unit. This can reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the gaming machine by assembling the unit to the gaming machine body.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the first groove is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first groove is formed. Space can be easily secured. That is, a space for forming the first groove is provided by utilizing a dead space of the holding member, which has to be formed into a relatively large outer shape in order to hold and form a unit by holding the driving means, the driven member and the driven member. Can be secured. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and extension length of the first groove portion can be increased, and accordingly, the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove formed in the holding member in a groove shape, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member while being guided along the second groove. Wherein the holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion or the second facing portion. The gaming machine B10, wherein the second groove is formed in the other of the first facing portion and the second facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other across the driven member, and the other is formed. Since the second groove is formed in the first groove, the first groove and the second groove can be formed without considering the formation position of the partner. That is, when forming both the first groove portion and the second groove portion in one of the first opposing portion and the second opposing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove portion and the second groove portion so as not to intersect. , The degree of freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both the first groove portion and the second groove portion, the contour (shape) and the extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the opponent. The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation of change that can be given to the mode of displacement can be increased accordingly.

  The gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, wherein at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at a start end or an end that is larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the load is reduced at the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member in the stopped state by the driving means, and the driving is smoothly performed. Can be started.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a shielding member that shields the driven member invisibly is provided, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a part of the driven member outside a region of the shielding member. A gaming machine B12, wherein a radius in a corresponding area from the start of exposure to the driven member until the entire driven member is exposed outside the shielding member is smaller than a reference value.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member is shielded, so that the driven member An effect in which the member suddenly appears or an effect in which the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.
<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the rotating operation unit 600 is an example>
A holding member; a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably disposed on the holding member; and a driving unit for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape, and is fitted concentrically with the first rotating body.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that performs an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (for example, paragraph 0162, see FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged to be separated from each other in the left and right directions are synchronously rotated in the same direction, respectively, so that the production has a sense of unity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged left and right apart, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations in association with each other and to rotate the plurality of rotating bodies. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is provided in order to solve the above-described problems. The rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies is associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize the rotation, and an effect is produced by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently exhibiting the effects of the above.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, since the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is fitted concentrically to the first rotating body, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are connected to each other. Can be rotated concentrically. As a result, the rotation of the first rotator and the rotation of the second rotator can be associated with each other to be easily recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of the effect by rotating each of the plurality of rotators can be sufficiently exhibited. Can be.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that an effect member or the like can be arranged on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotator surrounding the effect member and the second rotator surrounding the first rotator around the effect member. As a result, the effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body inserted into the holding member, a one-side flange protruding outward in a flange shape on one axial side of the main body, And a second flange that protrudes outward on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange portion and faces the first flange portion with the holding member interposed therebetween. A gaming machine C3, which is externally fitted to a main body of the first rotating body and is disposed between a flange on one side of the first rotating body and a holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed and held on one side and the other side in the axial direction of the main body and the main body inserted into the holding member. A second rotating body is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body, and the first rotating body has one side flange and a holding member. Therefore, the structure for holding the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body of the first rotating body is inserted into the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. In addition, since the other side flange portion of the first rotator abuts on the holding member, the displacement of the first rotator in one axial direction can be regulated, and the one side flange portion of the first rotator is rotated by the second rotation portion. The first rotating body can be restricted from moving in the other axial direction by being in contact with the body and the second rotating body being in contact with the holding member.

  Further, since the second rotator is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotator, the second rotator can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body of the first rotator. In addition, the second rotating body abuts on one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body abuts on the holding member, so that one side in the axial direction of the second rotating body. Can be regulated, and the displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the second rotating body with the holding member.

  In the gaming machine C3, a first gear and a second gear are provided on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. A gaming machine C4, wherein a gear meshed with the first gear and the second gear is engraved on an outer peripheral surface of the body and the second rotating body, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member and transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided with gears meshed with the first gear and the second gear on the outer peripheral surface, respectively. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a rendering member or the like is provided on the inner peripheral side of the main body, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, a structure that meshes with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is provided on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is provided on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side, and the first gear is provided. Is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the second gear is provided on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is provided on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. The first gear is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is meshed with a gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. The first gear and the second gear are compared with a case where both the first gear and the second gear are meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body on one side of the holding member, for example. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gear can be simplified.

  Also, the first gear, the other flange of the first rotating body meshed with the first gear, the one flange of the first rotating body, the main body, and the second rotating body are disposed. By being disposed on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body are provided to the player who views the one side of the holding member from the front. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure for invisiblely shielding the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body can be simplified using the holding member.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 and C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear A gaming machine C6 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, are provided. The one rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, for example, even when two rotators are rotated by one driving unit, the two rotators (first rotation The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be made different. As a result, the effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion formed in a cylindrical shape and protruding to the one side, and the first member is provided on an inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A gaming machine C7, wherein a main body portion of a rotating body is rotatably disposed on an outer peripheral side of a cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member has a cylindrical portion formed in a cylindrical shape and protruding to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member. The main body of the first rotator is rotatably disposed on the inner peripheral side of the portion, and the second rotator is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thereby, the arrangement positions of the first rotator and the second rotator can be defined based on the holding member, respectively, so that the gears engraved on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotator and the second rotator, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member can be defined based on the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement between the gears engraved on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body with the first gear and the second gear. As a result, uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed, and drive resistance can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotator includes a plurality of protrusions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body, extend in the axial direction of the main body, and are scattered at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A gaming machine C8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the main body of the first rotating body is protruded from the outer peripheral surface of the main body, extends in the axial direction of the main body, and has a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since a plurality of protrusions are provided, the contact area between the main body of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the protrusion, and the main body of the first rotating body is The rotation can be smoothly performed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  It is preferable that the protruding portion be curved in an arc shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut along a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion is outwardly convex. Since the contact area between the cylindrical portion of the holding member and the inner peripheral surface is suppressed, the main body of the first rotating body can be more smoothly rotated on the inner circumferential side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotator is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotator protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. A gaming machine C9 comprising a plurality of inward protrusions disposed at positions in phase with the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C8, the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body is projected from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. And a plurality of inner protruding portions disposed at positions that are in phase with the protruding portions (that is, on the rear surface side of the region where the protruding portions are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and its moldability can be ensured. .

  In the gaming machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened to positions corresponding to the protrusions. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has a main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are projected portions. In other words, since the protrusions also serve as screw fastening portions for fastening screws, the strength of the screw fastening portions can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one rotation locus of the first rotator or the second rotator in a front view and formed to be capable of emitting light. A gaming machine C11 comprising: a light emitting unit.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one of the first and second rotating bodies in the front view. When the first rotator and the second rotator are concentrically rotated, light emission by the illuminator on the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator is provided. Can be visually recognized. That is, the effect of rotating the first rotator and the second rotator can be performed at a position overlapping with the light emission by the light emitting means. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotators can be more effectively performed. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator has a first portion in which the light emitting unit is formed so as to be visible in a region where a rotation trajectory overlaps the light emitting unit in a front view. A gaming machine C12, wherein a second portion in which the light emitting means is invisible is arranged alternately in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body allows the light emitting means to be visually recognized in a region where the rotation trajectory overlaps the light emitting means in a front view. Since the first portion to be formed and the second portion in which the light emitting means are invisible are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. Since the portion and the second portion alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be intermittently visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of relating the intermittent light emission of the light emitting means to the rotation while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. As a result, an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies respectively. Can be performed more effectively.

  The gaming machine K1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10 and C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving force from a driving unit causes, for example, an overhanging position to be a front surface of the liquid crystal display device and a display of the liquid crystal display device from the overhanging position. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retreat position and a retreat position retracted in a direction outside a region is known (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-200790 (for example, paragraph 0095, 11 to 15)). According to this gaming machine, the output direction of the driving means is switched or the output is intermittent, thereby giving a change to the mode of displacement of the displacement member.
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the output of the driving unit is changed, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced in accordance with the change of the output of the driving unit. Since only the speed is changed and the direction of displacement remains constant, there has been a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a change to the mode of displacement of a displacement member while keeping the output of a drive unit constant. And
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, a driven member that is displaced by being driven by the driving force generated by the driving unit, and a driven member that is driven by the driving unit. A driven member connected to the driven member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement defining means for defining a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. The displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, so that when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member moves relative to the driven member. Relative displacement.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove on one of the driven member and the holding member, and a first groove formed on the first groove. And a first guided portion formed on the other of the driven member and the holding member.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving unit, the displacement defining unit defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, thereby driving the driven member. With the displacement of the member, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a fixed trajectory such as a straight line or an arc, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from the driven member. In addition, since the change in the mode of the displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced on the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove and the first guided portion, and the first groove is formed along the first groove. By guiding the guided portion, the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be defined. Thus, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, whereby the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the first groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped portion (first groove portion) and the portion guided by the portion (first guided portion), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state. When the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the member, the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong impression change as a change in the mode of displacement. be able to.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
60 Base plate (front member)
86 Center frame (front member)
410 Case body (holding member)
420 drive motor (drive means)
431 Pinion gear (part of transmission means)
432 Intermediate gear (part of transmission means)
433 Crank gear (part of transmission means, rotating member)
440 Base displacement member (part of displacement member)
444 second slide hole (slide groove)
450 Relative displacement member (part of displacement member)
453 slide pin (pin member)
460 Connecting rod (part of transmission means, link member)
480 Decoration member 510 Front case body (part of holding means , first member, shielding member)
513 First guide groove (first groove, part of displacement regulating means)
523 Second guide groove (second groove, part of displacement regulating means)
520 Back case body (part of holding means , second member, shielding member)
530 drive motor (drive means)
550 Driven member 552a Connection groove (connection groove, part of displacement regulating means)
560 driven member (displacement member)
561a First pin (first guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
561b Connecting shaft (second guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
563a Contact surface (contact part)
610 Front case body (part of holding member)
612 Cylindrical part 620 Back case body (part of holding member)
630 drive motor (drive means)
631 pinion gear (part of first transmission means, part of second transmission means)
641 first storage gear (part of first transmission means, part of second transmission means)
642 Second storage gear (first gear)
643 Third storage gear (part of second transmission means)
644 fourth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
645 Fifth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
646 Front gear (2nd gear)
650 First rotator 651 Body 651a First protrusion (part of protrusion, inner protrusion)
651b Second protrusion (part of protrusion, inner protrusion)
652 Front directing part (one side flange part, first part and second part)
653 Storage flange (other side flange)
653a First outer peripheral gear (gear carved on outer peripheral surface of first rotating body)
660 Second rotating body 661a Second outer peripheral gear (gear carved on the outer peripheral surface of second rotating body)
670 Spherical liquid crystal device (production member)
682 Light emitting element (light emitting means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that displaceably holds the driven member.
A driven member that is displaceably connected to the driven member, and a displacement defining unit that defines a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member,
When the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member is defined by the displacement defining means, the driven member is displaced with respect to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means. A gaming machine characterized by being relatively displaced.   The displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member and the holding member, and a first groove formed on the other of the driven member and the holding member while being guided along the first groove. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: one guided portion.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

Images